Anda di halaman 1dari 414

Autodesk Civil 3D 2007

Subassembly Reference

April 2006

Copyright 2006 Autodesk, Inc.


All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Backdraft, Bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Civil 3D, Cleaner, Combustion, Create>whats>Next (design/logo), DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), EditDV, Education by Design, FBX, Filmbox, Gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, i-drop, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Open Reality, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, SketchBook, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, CAiCE, Cinestream, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, Gmax (logo), Gmax ready (logo), Heads-up Design, HumanIK, Incinerator, jobnet, LocationLogic, MotionBuilder, ObjectDBX, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Wiretap.

Autodesk Canada Co.Trademarks


The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Flint RT, Frost, Glass, Inferno, MountStone, Riot, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Stream, Vapour, Wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: Backburner, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks


All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits


ACIS Copyright 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright 2002 Autodesk, Inc. HLM is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd. HLM Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 1996-2004. AnswerWorks 4.0 ; 1997-2005 Vantage Software Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions Copyright 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Libpng is copyright 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson. Libtiff is Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler And Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Active Delivery 2.0. 1999-2004 Inner Media, Inc. All rights reserved. Produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. International CorrectSpell Spelling Correction System 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield 3.0. Copyright 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. Macromedia and Flash are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States or other countries.

PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2002. Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut fr Gtesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust 1996. All rights reserved. Printed and Help produced with Idiom WorldServer Portions Copyright 1996-2006 Macrovision Corporation. All rights reserved. Stingray is Copyright 1995-2005, Quovadx, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Protected by copyright and licenses restricting use, copying, distribution and decompilation. The Rogue Wave name and logo and the Stingray name and logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Quovadx, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Xerces is Copyright 1999-2005, The Apache Software Foundation. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; you may not use this file except in compliance with the license. You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). MrSID image compression format is Copyright 2005, LizardTech, a division of Celartem,Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID technology is protected by U.S. Patent No 5,710,835 and patents pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. The OSTN97 coordinate transformation is Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. The OSTN02 coordinate transformation is Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. The OSGM02 coordinate transformation is Crown copyright 2002, Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. Libcurl is Copyright 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. All rights reserved. The Redland RDF Application Framework is Copyright 2000-2005 Institute for Learning and Research Technology, University of Bristol. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; you may not use this file except in compliance with the license. You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0. GDAL is Copyright 2000, Frank Warmerdam.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Chapter 1

Subassembly Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Introduction to Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 BasicBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 BasicCurb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 BasicCurbAndGutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BasicGuardrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 BasicLane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 BasicLaneTransition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 BasicShoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 BasicSideSlopeCutDitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 BasicSideWalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 BridgeBoxGirder1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 BridgeBoxGirder2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 ChannelParabolicBottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 DaylightBasin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 DaylightBench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 DaylightGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 DaylightMaxOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 DaylightMaxWidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 DaylightMinOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 DaylightMinWidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 DaylightMultiIntercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

DaylightStandard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 DaylightToOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 DaylightToROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 GenericPavementStructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 LaneBrokenBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 LaneFromTaperedMedian1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 LaneFromTaperedMedian2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 LaneInsideSuper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 LaneOutsideSuper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 LaneParabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 LaneTowardCrown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Chapter 2

Subassembly Reference (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163


LinkMulti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LinkOffsetAndElevation . . . . . . LinkOffsetAndSlope . . . . . . . . LinkOffsetOnSurface . . . . . . . . LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection . . LinkSlopesBetweenPoints . . . . . LinkSlopeToElevation . . . . . . . LinkSlopeToSurface . . . . . . . . LinkToMarkedPoint . . . . . . . . LinkVertical . . . . . . . . . . . . LinkWidthAndSlope . . . . . . . . MarkPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . MedianDepressed . . . . . . . . . MedianDepressedShoulderExt . . . MedianDepressedShoulderVert . . MedianFlushWithBarrier . . . . . . MedianRaisedConstantSlope . . . . MedianRaisedWithCrown . . . . . OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges . OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters . . OverlayCrownBetweenEdges . . . OverlayMedianAsymmetrical . . . OverlayMedianSymmetrical . . . . OverlayMillAndLevel1 . . . . . . . OverlayMillAndLevel2 . . . . . . . OverlayParabolic . . . . . . . . . . OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 . . . . OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 . . . . OverlayWidenWithSuper1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 . 167 . 169 . 172 . 174 . 176 . 179 . 181 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 191 . 193 . 196 . 203 . 210 . 216 . 218 . 221 . 227 . 234 . 239 . 246 . 251 . 259 . 269 . 273 . 278 . 284

Chapter 3

Subassembly Reference (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

vi | Contents

RailSingle . . . . . . . . . . RetainWallTapered . . . . . RetainWallTaperedWide . . RetainWallTieToDitch . . . RetainWallToLowSide . . . RetainWallVertical . . . . . ShapeTrapezoidal . . . . . . ShoulderExtendAll . . . . . ShoulderExtendSubbase . . ShoulderVerticalSubbase . . SideDitch . . . . . . . . . . SideDitchUShape . . . . . . SideDitchWithLid . . . . . SnapToMarkedPoint . . . . StrippingPavement . . . . . StrippingTopSoil . . . . . . TrenchWithPipe . . . . . . TrenchPipe1 . . . . . . . . UrbanCurbGutterGeneral . UrbanCurbGutterValley1 . UrbanCurbGutterValley2 . UrbanCurbGutterValley3 . UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 . UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 . UrbanReplaceSidewalk . . . UrbanSidewalk . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 293 . 297 . 302 . 307 . 312 . 316 . 321 . 325 . 330 . 336 . 341 . 344 . 348 . 354 . 356 . 360 . 362 . 366 . 369 . 373 . 377 . 381 . 385 . 392 . 397 . 401

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Contents | vii

Subassembly Reference

1
In this chapter

These topics describe the construction and behavior for each subassembly included in the Autodesk Civil 3D Corridor Modeling catalogs. For more information on subassemblies, see Assemblies and Subassemblies in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

Introduction to Subassemblies BasicBarrier BasicCurb BasicCurbAndGutter BasicGuardrail BasicLane BasicLaneTransition BasicShoulder BasicSideSlopeCutDitch BasicSideWalk BridgeBoxGirder1 BridgeBoxGirder2 Channel ChannelParabolicBottom DaylightBasin DaylightBench DaylightGeneral DaylightMaxOffset DaylightMaxWidth DaylightMinOffset DaylightMinWidth

DaylightMultiIntercept DaylightStandard DaylightToOffset DaylightToROW GenericPavementStructure LaneBrokenBack LaneFromTaperedMedian1 LaneFromTaperedMedian2 LaneInsideSuper LaneOutsideSuper LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening LaneParabolic LaneTowardCrown

2 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Introduction to Subassemblies
Autodesk Civil 3D subassemblies are preconfigured AutoCAD drawing objects that let you design three-dimensional sections of roadways and other corridor-type structures. These Help topics describe the construction and behavior of the subassemblies included in the Autodesk Civil 3D Corridor Modeling catalogs. Refer to the Assemblies and Subassemblies section of the Autodesk Civil 3D Help for more information on using subassemblies for corridor design.

BasicBarrier
Creates a two-sided New Jersey barrier on a roadway surface. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the center of the bottom of the barrier.

Introduction to Subassemblies | 3

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Top Width

Description
Width of the top of the barrier

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
0.15 m 0.5 ft 0.225 m 0.75 ft 0.6 m 2.0 ft 0.9 m 3.0 ft 0.45 m 1.5 ft 0.075 m 0.25 ft 0.6 m 1.9 ft

Middle Width

Width of the middle of the barrier

Numeric, positive

Bottom Width

Width of the bottom of the barrier

Numeric, positive

Top Height

Height to the top of the barrier

Numeric, positive

Middle Height

Height to the middle of the barrier

Numeric, positive

Curb Height

Height of the barrier curb

Numeric, positive

Curb Width

Width at the top of the barrier curb

Numeric, positive

Output Parameters
None.

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Behavior
The subassembly constructs the shape of a two-sided New Jersey barrier, with the base centered about the attachment point.

4 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the barrier shape as specified by the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 - P8 All links S1

Codes
P1, P2, ... P8 Barrier Barrier

Description

Coding Diagram

BasicCurb
Creates a a simple curb at the edge of roadway. It can be attached to either outside edge of pavement or to the edge of a median on the inside. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

BasicCurb | 5

Attachment
The attachment point is on the front face of the curb for case 1, and on the back face of the curb for case 2.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of curb

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Boolean

0.225 m 0.75 ft 0.45 m 1.5 ft Front Face

Depth

Depth of the curb

Attachment Point

Specifies the attachment point of the curb as either Front Face or Back Face Depth of the curb below inside attachment point Exposed height of the back face of curb

Depth Below

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.3 m 1.0 ft 0.0 m 0.0 ft

Back Height

6 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The subassembly builds a rectangular shape for a simple curb, with the attachment point at the bottom inside edge of curb.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the curb shape as specified by the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 P2 P3 All links S1

Codes
BottomCurb TopCurb BackCurb Curb Curb

Description
Inside bottom of curb Inside top of curb Outside top of curb

BasicCurb | 7

Coding Diagram

BasicCurbAndGutter
Creates a a simple curb and gutter structure at the inside or outside edges of roadway. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or back of the curb.

8 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as either Gutter Edge or Back of Curb Width from the flange of the gutter to the flowline % slope of the gutter Height from the flowline to the top of curb Width of the top of curb

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Insertion Point

Boolean

Gutter Edge

Gutter Width

Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.45 m 1.5 ft -6% 0.225 m 0.75 ft 0.15 m 0.5 ft 0.45 m 1.5 ft

Gutter %Slope Curb Height

Curb Width

Curb Depth

Depth from the top of curb to the bottom of curb at the back-of-curb point

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter with the attachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) back of

BasicCurbAndGutter | 9

the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make it non-vertical.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the curb and gutter shape as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1, L2, L3 L4 S1

Codes
Flange Flowline_Gutter TopCurb BackCurb Top, Curb Datum Curb

Description
Flange of gutter Flowline of the gutter Top of curb Back of curb Curb links on finish grade

Coding Diagram

10 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

BasicGuardrail
Creates a simple guardrail shape on the assembly. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the post at finish grade level.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

BasicGuardrail | 11

Behavior
The subassembly builds two rectangular shapes for the post and railing. The dimensions are fixed, and cannot be changed by the user. The post extends downward from the attachment point for a fixed distance below finish grade.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the post and rail with the fixed dimensions.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


The code Guardrail is assigned to all points. No link or shape codes are assigned.

BasicLane
Creates a simple lane. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on finish grade.

12 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of the lane

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft 0.2 m 0.67 ft -2%

Depth

Depth from finish grade to subbase

Numeric, positive

%Slope

% Slope of the lane

Numeric

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
Parameter
Side Width Depth %Slope

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of the lane Depth from finish grade to subbase % Slope of the lane

Type
Left / Right Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric

Behavior
The subassembly builds a finish grade and subbase surface, closed by vertical links at either end. The lane is inserted outward from the attachment point for the given width, depth, and slope.

BasicLane | 13

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1 L3 S1

Codes
Crown ETW Crown_Subbase ETW_Subbase Top, Pave Datum, Subbase Pave1

Description
Crown of road on finish grade Edge-of-traveled-way on finish grade Crown of road on subbase Edge-of-traveled-way on subbase Paved finish grade Subbase

Coding Diagram

BasicLaneTransition
Creates a simple lane with finish grade and subbase, where the edge-of-traveled-way can be tied to an alignment or profile. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

14 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on finish grade.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of lane

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft 0.2 m 0.67 ft -2% Hold offset and elevation

Depth

Depth from finish grade to subbase

Numeric, positive

%Slope Transition

% Slope of the lane Describes how the subassembly behaves when an alignment, profile, or both are used as runtime logical assignments. Choices are provided in a list including: Hold offset and elevation Hold elevation, change offset Hold grade, change offset Hold offset, change elevation

Numeric Menu

BasicLaneTransition | 15

Parameter

Description
Change offset and elevation

Type

Default

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Edge Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Width value and tie the edge-of-traveled-way to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed slope and tie the edge-of-traveled-way to an offset profile.

Status
Optional

Edge Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly provides a simple travel lane that can tie to an alignment for variable width, and a profile for variable slope. The behavior depends on the Transition type selected: Transition Type
Hold offset and elevation

Description
The width and slope of the lane is held to the Width and % Slope input parameter values. The elevation of the edge-of-traveled-way is calculated from the Width and % slope input parameter values. The width is then tied to the offset alignment. The width is adjusted to tie to the offset alignment. The % Slope input value is held for the adjusted width.

Hold elevation, change offset

Hold grade, change offset

16 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Transition Type
Hold offset, change elevation

Description
The width is held to the Width input parameter value. The elevation of the edge-of-traveled-way is tied to the offset profile. The width is tied to the offset alignment, and the slope is adjusted to tie the elevation of the edge-of-traveled-way to the offset profile.

Change offset and elevation

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1

Codes
Crown ETW Crown_Subbase ETW_Subbase Top, Pave Datum, Subbase Pave1

Description
Crown of road on finish grade Edge-of-traveled-way on finish grade Crown of road on subbase Edge-of-traveled-way on subbase Paved finish grade

L3

Subbase

S1

BasicLaneTransition | 17

Coding Diagram

BasicShoulder
Creates a simple paved shoulder with finish grade and subbase. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the shoulder on the finish grade.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of shoulder

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric, positive

0.9 m 3 ft

18 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Depth

Description
Depth from finish grade to subbase

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
0.2 m 0.67 ft -4%

%Slope

% Slope of the shoulder

Numeric

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The shoulder links are inserted outwards from the attachment point at the given width, slope, and depth.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P2

Codes
EPS

Description
Edge of paved shoulder on finish grade Edge of paved shoulder on subbase Paved finish grade

P4 L1

EPS_Sub Top, Pave Datum, Subbase Pave1

L3 S1

Subbase

BasicShoulder | 19

Coding Diagram

BasicSideSlopeCutDitch
Used to close from the edge of roadway to a daylight point in both cut and fill conditions. The cut condition includes an optional ditch. The final daylighting link can be omitted for cases where the corridor model needs to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway. This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes. You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

20 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the ditch foreslope for cut, and at the inside edge of the daylight link for fill.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Includes or omits the Daylight link.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Daylight Link

Include / Omit

Include

BasicSideSlopeCutDitch | 21

Parameter
Cut Slope

Description
Slope of the daylight link for cut Slope of the daylight link for fill Slope of the ditch foreslope link (cut only) Width of the ditch foreslope link (cut only) Width of the bottom of ditch

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
2:1

Fill Slope Foreslope Slope

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

4:1 4:1

Foreslope Width

Numeric, positive

1.2 m 4.0 ft 0.6 m 2.0 ft 4:1

Bottom Width

Numeric, positive

Backslope Slope

Slope of the ditch backslope link (cut only) Width of the ditch backslope link (cut only) Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Numeric, positive

Backslope Width

Numeric, positive

1.2 m 4.0 ft None

Place Lined Material

String

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness

Numeric, positive

12 inches

Material 1 Name

String

Rip Rap

22 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Slope Limit 2

Description
Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
Slope

Default
2:1

Material 2 Thickness

Numeric, positive

6 inches

Material 2 Name

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

Material 3 Name

String

Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Daylight Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the surface for daylighting

Status
Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The attachment point is tested to determine if it is in cut or fill. If it is in fill, the fill daylight link is extended to the Daylight Surface at the given Fill Slope. If in cut, the foreslope, ditch bottom, and backslope are added, and the cut

BasicSideSlopeCutDitch | 23

daylight link is extended from the end of the backslope to the Daylight Surface at the given Cut Slope. This subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws a generic cut and fill slope with arrows at the ends.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Codes
Hinge Hinge_Fill Ditch_In Daylight Daylight_Fill Ditch_Out Hinge_Cut

Description
Fill condition only - hinge point for fill daylight link Cut condition only - inside edge of ditch Fill condition only - daylight point

P2

P3 P4

Cut condition only - outside edge of ditch Cut condition only - hinge point for cut daylight link Cut condition only - daylight point

P5

Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum

L1 - L4

Unpaved finish grade

24 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape


L1

Codes
Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut

Description
Daylight link in fill

L4

Daylight link in cut

Coding Diagram

BasicSideWalk
Used to insert links defining a concrete sidewalk with optional boulevards.

BasicSideWalk | 25

This is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the inside buffer.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicateswhich side the subassembly is inserted toward Width of the concrete sidewalk

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric, positive

1.8 m 6.0 ft 0.1 m 0.333 ft 0 ft, m 0 ft, m

Depth

Depth of the concrete sidewalk

Numeric, positive

Buffer Width 1 Buffer Width 2

Width of the inside buffer zone Width of the outside buffer zone

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

26 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The links for the inside buffer zone, sidewalk, and outside buffer zone are inserted outward from the attachment point at a horizontal slope. The buffer zones may be omitted by setting their widths to zero.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the buffer zone and sidewalk as specified by the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P2 P3 L1

Codes
Sidewalk_In Sidewalk_Out Top Datum Top Sidewalk Top Datum Sidewalk Datum Sidewalk

Description
Inside edge of sidewalk on finish grade Outside edge of sidewalk on finish grade

L2

Sidewalk structure top links

L3

L4 - L6

S1

Sidewalk concrete area

BasicSideWalk | 27

Coding Diagram

BridgeBoxGirder1
Creates a simple box girder bridge shape with optional half-barriers. This subassembly is designed to be used for visualization, not for structural design.

28 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Attachment
The attachment point is at the centerline on the bridge deck finish grade. The bridge section is built to the left and right sides.

BridgeBoxGirder1 | 29

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Left Width

Description
Width of the left side of the bridge deck Width of the right side of the bridge deck % slope of the left deck surface. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope (left) LO: outside lane slope (left) % slope of the right deck surface. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope (right) LO: outside lane slope (right) Vertical distance from the edge of bridge deck to the soffit Thickness of the bridge deck at the edge

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
5.34 m 17.8 ft 5.34 m 17.8 ft LO

Right Width

Numeric, positive

Left %Slope

Numeric or string

Right %Slope

Numeric or string

LO

Soffit Depth

Numeric, positive

2.0 m 6.67 ft 0.150 m 0.5 ft

Edge Depth

Numeric, positive

30 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Flange Depth

Description
Vertical distance from the edge of bridge deck to the root of the flange Width of the overhang

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
0.300 m 1.0 ft

Overhang Width

Numeric, positive

1.2 m 4.0 ft 2.0 m 6.67 ft Include

Girder Width

Width of the girder

Numeric, positive

Include Barriers Omit Barriers Barrier A (mm or inches)

Includes or omits barriers to each side of the bridge deck. Height of the barrier at the center of median As shown in diagram

Include / Omit

Numeric, positive

810 mm 32 in 131 mm 4.5 in 59 mm 2 in 125 mm 5 in 557 mm 22 in 178 mm 7 in

Barrier B (mm or inches)

Numeric, positive

Barrier C (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Numeric, positive

Barrier D (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Numeric, positive

Barrier E (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Numeric, positive

Barrier F (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Numeric, positive

BridgeBoxGirder1 | 31

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Left Width value and tie the left edge-of-deck to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed Right Width value and tie the right edge-of-deck to an offset alignment.

Status
Optional

Right Width

Alignment

Optional

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The subassembly builds the links for the bridge deck and under-structure based on the input parameter values given. In superelevation, not all of the structure is rotated. The Soffit Depth is held to thegiven value from the top-edge-of-deck on the low side of the bridge, and the height of the girder is adjusted on the high side to the root of the deck. If Include Barriers is True, New Jersey barrier sections are added at the left and right edges-of-deck. The slopes of the barrier bottoms adjust to match the deck slopes.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the bridge structure and barriers as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1, P3 P2

Codes
EBD Crown_Deck

Description
Edge of bridge deck Crown point on bridge deck

32 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape


L1, L2 L3 L9 All barrier links S1 S2, S3

Codes
Deck, Top Bridge Barrier Bridge Barrier

Description

Bridge substructure links

Coding Diagram

BridgeBoxGirder2
Creates a two-chamber box girder bridge shape with optional half-barriers. This subassembly is designed to be used for visualization, not for structural design.

BridgeBoxGirder2 | 33

Attachment
The attachment point is at the dividing line between the left and right lanes, on the bridge deck finish grade. The bridge section is built to the left and right sides.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Left Lane Width

Description
Width of the left lanes of the bridge deck

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
5.34 m 17.8 ft

34 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Right Lane Width

Description
Width of the right lanes of the bridge deck % slope of the bridge deck from the left edge to the right edge. The slope is constant across the entire width of the deck. Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope (left) LO: outside lane slope (left) Includes or omits barriers to each side of the bridge deck. Deck thickness at the edge

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric or string

Default
5.34 m 17.8 ft LO

Deck %Slope

Include Barriers Omit Barriers Dimension A

Include / Omit

Include

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.200 m 0.667 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft 1.8 m 6.0 ft 0.150 m 0.5 ft 1.425 m 4.75 ft 0.170 m 0.5625 ft 0.250 m 0.833 ft 0.210 m 0.7 ft

Dimension B

Deck thickness at the flange

Dimension C

Total depth from finish grade to bottom of soffit Step width

Dimension D

Dimension E

Total flange width

Dimension F

Bottom girder thickness

Dimension G

Center girder thickness

Dimension H

Top girder thickness

BridgeBoxGirder2 | 35

Parameter
Dimension I

Description
Width of the top corner of the inside girder Step height

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
0.300 m 1.0 ft 0.600 m 2.0 ft 810 mm 32 in 131 mm 4.5 in 59 mm 2 in 125 mm 5 in 557 mm 22 in 178 mm 7 in

Dimension J

Barrier A (mm or inches)

Height of the barrier at the center of median As shown in diagram

Barrier B (mm or inches)

Barrier C (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Barrier D (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Barrier E (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Barrier F (mm or inches)

As shown in diagram

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Left Width and tie the left edge-of-deck to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed Right Width and tie the right edge-of-deck to an offset alignment at each station along the corridor.

Status
Optional

Right Width

Alignment

Optional

36 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The subassembly builds the links for the bridge deck and under-structure based on the input parameter values given. If the LI or LO options are used for the bridge deck, the superelevation slope for the left side is held constant across the entire width of the bridge. If Include Barriers is True, one-sided New Jersey barrier sections are added at the left and right edges-of-deck. The slopes of the barrier bottoms adjust to match the deck slopes.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the bridge structure and barriers as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1, P3 P2 L1

Code
EBD Crown_Deck Deck, Top Bridge Girder

Description
Edge of bridge deck Crown point on bridge deck

All exterior bridge substructure links All interior bridge substructure links

All barrier links S1 S2, S3

Barrier Bridge Barrier

BridgeBoxGirder2 | 37

Coding Diagram

Channel
This subassembly creates an open channel with optional lining and backslope links.

38 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Attachment
The attachment point is located above the midpoint of the bottom width, at a height equal to the Depth parameter.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Depth

Description
The vertical offset down from the profile grade line elevation to the bottom of the channel. Width of bottom of the channel.

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default
2.0 m 6.0 ft

Bottom Width

Numeric, Positive

2.0 m 6.0 ft 1 (:1) 0.1m 0.33ft

Sideslope Lining Depth

Channel sideslopes Depth of channel lining

Numeric Numeric, Positive

Left Marked Point

Optional marked point on the outermost channel point on the left side; If no code is entered then marked point is not inserted. Optional marked point on the outermost channel point on he right side; If no code is entered then marked point is not inserted. Extension of channel left side over the insertion point Channel backfill width on left side

String

Right Marked Point

String

Left Extension Height Left Backslope Width

Numeric, Positive

0.5m 1.67ft 1.5 m 5.0 ft

Numeric, Positive

Channel | 39

Parameter
Left Backslope Right Extension Height Right Backslope Width Right Backslope

Description
Channel backfill slope on left side Extension of channel right side over the insertion point Channel backfill width on he right side

Type
Numeric Numeric, Positive

Default
4 (:1) 0.5 m 1.67 ft 1.5 m 5.0 ft 4 (:1)

Numeric, Positive

Channel backfill slope on right side

Numeric

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Extension Height

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed extension height on left side and tie to a profile. May be used to override the fixed Left Backslope Width and tie to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed Left Backslope and tie to a profile. May be used to override the fixed extension height on right side and tie to a profile. May be used to override the fixed Right Backslope Width and tie to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed Right Backslope and tie to a profile.

Status
Optional

Left Backslope Width

Alignment

Optional

Left Backslope Elevation Right Extension Height

Profile

Optional

Profile

Optional

Left Backslope Width

Alignment

Optional

Left Backslope Elevation

Profile

Optional

40 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly builds an open channel shape using the input parameters. The attachment point is typically at the start of the baseline, at associated alignments and profiles. The bottom link of the channel is then drawn using a specified width. Using the sideslope parameter, the channel sides are drawn on either sides. For the channel lining depth, if a non-zero positive value is specified, then a material lining is drawn around the channel, with horizontal (or vertical at the bottom) offset of the lining equal to that parameter. If a zero value is specified for the lining, then no links are inserted. Similarly, if a zero value is specified for left or right extensions and backslope widths, those links are omitted, or are not drawn. Extension height can be controlled with a runtime logical assignment profile association. Similarly, the height of the backslope end point can be specified to a profile. To force the outer backslope point to the channel top elevation, associate this point to the channels finish grade profile, to which this assembly is attached. If the Backslope Width is omitted, the Right Marked Point is located on the outer point of channel height extension. If the Channel Height Extension link is also omitted, then the marked point is located on the outermost point on the channel top.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the input parameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P2,P3 P4, P5

Codes
Channel_Flowline Channel_Bottom Channel_Top

Description
Middle point of the channel bottom

Channel | 41

Point/Link
P6,P7 P8,P9 P13 L1, L2, L3

Codes
Channel_Extension Channel_Backslope

Description

Datum, Channel_Bottom and Top (if lining is NOT used) Datum, Top Channel_Bottom and TOP (if lining IS used) Lining_Material Channel Lining Material

L4 to L7 L8 to L12

S1

Coding Diagram

42 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

ChannelParabolicBottom
This subassembly creates an open channel with a parabolic bottom, with optional lining and backslope links.

Attachment
The attachment point is located above the midpoint of the bottom width, at a height equal to the Depth parameter.

ChannelParabolicBottom | 43

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Depth

Description
The vertical offset down from the profile grade line elevation to the bottom of the channel. Width of bottom of the channel.

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default
2.0 m 6.0 ft

Bottom Width

Numeric, Positive

2.0 m 6.0 ft 7

Curve Tesselation Points Sideslope Lining Depth

Number of tesselation points on parabolic curve Channel sideslopes Depth of channel lining

Integer, Positive

Numeric Numeric, Positive

1 (:1) 0.1 m 0.33 ft

Left Marked Point

Optional marked point on the outermost channel point on the left side; If no code is entered then marked point is not inserted. Optional marked point on the outermost channel point on he right side; If no code is entered then marked point is not inserted. Extension of channel left side over the insertion point Channel backfill width on left side

String

Right Marked Point

String

Left Extension Height

Numeric, Positive

0.5 m 1.67 ft 1.5 m 5.0 ft 4 (:1)

Left Backslope Width

Numeric, Positive

Left Backslope

Channel backfill slope on left side

Numeric

44 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Right Extension Height

Description
Extension of channel right side over the insertion point Channel backfill width on he right side Channel backfill slope on right side

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default
0.5 m 1.67 ft 1.5 m 5.0 ft 4 (:1)

Right Backslope Width

Numeric, Positive

Right Backslope

Numeric

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Extension Height

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed extension height on left side and tie to a profile. May be used to override the fixed Left Backslope Width and tie to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed Left Backslope and tie to a profile. May be used to override the fixed extension height on right side and tie to a profile. May be used to override the fixed Right Backslope Width and tie to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed Right Backslope and tie to a profile.

Status
Optional

Left Backslope Width

Alignment

Optional

Left Backslope Elevation

Profile

Optional

Right Extension Height

Profile

Optional

Left Backslope Width

Alignment

Optional

Left Backslope Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
None.

ChannelParabolicBottom | 45

Behavior
This subassembly builds an open channel shape using the input parameters. The attachment point is typically at the start of the baseline, at associated alignments and profiles. At the bottom left and right lower sideslope link, points are located using a specified Bottom Width parameter. A parabolic curve is drawn between these two points with grade-in and grade-out equal to the specified sideslope parameter. The length of the parabolic curve is equal to the Bottom Width value. This parabolic curve is drawn in tessellated links using the Curve Tessellation Points parameter. If the tessellation index is odd, then a point is added directly below the attachment point of the subassembly. For the channel lining depth, if a non-zero positive value is specified, then a material lining is drawn around the channel with a horizontal (or vertical at the bottom) offset of the lining equal to that parameter. If a zero value is specified for the lining, then no links are inserted. Similarly, if a zero value is specified for left or right extensions and backslope widths, those links are omitted or are not drawn. Extension height can be controlled with a profile runtime logical assignment association. Similarly, the height of the outermost backslope point can be specified with a profile runtime logical assignment. To force the outermost backslope point to the channel top height, associate this to the channels finish grade profile, tto which this assembly is attached. If the Backslope Width is omitted, then the marked point is located on the outer point of the channel height extension. If the Channel Height Extention link is also omitted, then the marked point is located on the outermost point of the channel top.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the input parameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P2,P3

Codes
Channel_Flowline Channel_Bottom

Description
Middle point of the channel bottom

46 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point/Link
P4, P5 P6,P7 P8,P9 P13 L1, L2, L3

Codes
Channel_Top Channel_Extension Channel_Backslope

Description

Datum, Channel_Bottom and Top (if lining is NOT used) Datum, Top Channel_Bottom and TOP (if lining IS used) Lining_Material Channel Lining Material

L4 to L7 L8 to L12

S1

Coding Diagram

ChannelParabolicBottom | 47

DaylightBasin
Inserts links to create a basin and cut daylight slope for a cut condition, or a basin, berm, and fill slope for a fill condition. The final daylighting link can be omitted in cases where the corridor model needs to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway. You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

48 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the basin foreslope. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Includes or omits the Daylight link. Includes or omits the Daylight link.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Daylight Link Include Daylight Link Omit Daylight Link

Include / Omit Include / Omit

Include Omit

DaylightBasin | 49

Parameter
ForeSlope Slope ForeSlope Width

Description
The slope for the basin foreslope link The width of the foreslope

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
3 ( : 1) 1.2 m 4.0 ft 0.0

Basin Depth

The depth of the bottom of the basin from the bottom of the foreslope link The slope of the sides of the basin

Numeric, positive

Basin Slope

Numeric, positive

1.8 m 6.0 ft 1.8 m 6.0 ft 1.8 m 6.0 ft 3 ( : 1)

Basin Width

Width of the basin

Numeric, positive

Berm Width

Width of the berm used in fill conditions The slope of the daylight link in cut conditions The slope of the daylight link in fill conditions Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Numeric, positive

Cut Slope

Numeric, positive

Fill Slope

Numeric, positive

3 ( : 1)

Place Lined Material

String

None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness

Numeric, positive

12 inches

50 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Material 1 Name

Description
Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
String

Default
Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness

Numeric, positive

6 inches

Material 2 Name

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

Material 3 Name

String

Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Basin Elevation

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed Basin Depth and tie the elevation of the basin to a profile. Name of the daylighting surface.

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
None.

DaylightBasin | 51

Behavior
The subassembly builds the links for the basin foreslope and basin out to the basin test point. If a profile is given, the width of the foreslope varies to hold to the basin profile, while the basin depth is held constant. If the basin test point is in cut, the daylight intercept is calculated on the target surface at the given Cut Slope. If it is in fill, a top-of-berm link is added, and the daylight intercept is calculated on the target surface at the given Fill Slope. The daylight link is not inserted if Omit Daylight Link is set to True. If the top-of-berm link intersects the target surface, the section is terminated at the intersection. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the foreslope, basin sideslopes, and basin bottom with the given input parameter values. Both the cut and fill condition links are shown in dashed lines, with the daylight links extended outward for a width of 3 meters or 10 feet at the given slopes. The daylight links terminate in arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P3 P4 P5

Code
Ditch_In Ditch_Out Hinge Hinge_Cut Hinge

Description
Inside bottom of basin Outside bottom of basin Hinge point for the cut condition

P6

Hinge point for the fill condition

52 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape

Code
Hinge_Fill

Description

P7

Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Daylight point, and daylight point for either the cut or fill condition

All links

L6

Daylight link for cut section

L6

Daylight link for fill section

Coding Diagram

DaylightBasin | 53

DaylightBench
Inserts links to create cut or fill catch slopes with repeating benches as needed. You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the initial cut or fill slope. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

54 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly The slope for the cut daylight slope The maximum allowable height for the cut daylight link without benching The slope for the fill daylight slope The maximum allowable height for the fill daylight link without benching The width of the bench

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Cut Slope Max Cut Height

Numeric, positive Numeric

2 ( : 1) 3.0 m 10.0 ft

Fill Slope Max Fill Height

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

2 ( : 1) 3.0 m 10.0 ft 1.5 m 5.0 ft 2 (%)

Bench Width

Numeric, positive

Bench % Slope

The +/- % slope of the bench. Positive slopes are upward in the direction of increasing offset Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Numeric

Place Lined Material

String

None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness

Numeric, positive

12 inches

DaylightBench | 55

Parameter
Material 1 Name

Description
Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
String

Default
Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness

Numeric, positive

6 inches

Material 2 Name

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

Material 3 Name

String

Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Daylight Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

56 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Behavior
The initial hinge point is set at the attachment point. The hinge point elevation is checked against the target surface to determine if the section is in the cut or fill condition. An intercept is calculated to the target surface using the given Cut Slope or Fill Slope. If the height to the intercept exceeds the Max Height, the link with the Max Height is inserted, and the bench link is added. The hinge point is reset to the outside edge of the bench and the process is repeated until a daylight link is found that does not exceed the Max Height. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws the initial cut and fill slopes to their maximum heights, a single bench, followed by cut and fill daylight slopes for half the maximum heights. The daylight links terminate with an arrowhead pointing outwards.

DaylightBench | 57

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Bench_In Bench_Out Top Datum Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Description
Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condition. This only applies to the inside edge of the actual daylighting link. Daylight point, and daylight point for either the cut or fill condition. This only applies to the actual daylight point. The inside edge of the bench(es) The outside edge of the bench(es)

P2

P2 P3 All links

Final daylight link

Daylight link for cut section

Final daylight link

Daylight link for fill section

58 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Coding Diagram

DaylightGeneral
This subassembly is a generalized solution to closing the sections from the outside edge of roadway to cut or fill intercept point. It provides a variety of solutions for cut and fill conditions, as described below. Based on the input parameters provided, it first attempts to build a cut section. If unable to do this it builds a fill section instead. The final daylighting link can be omitted for cases where the corridor model needs to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway.

DaylightGeneral | 59

60 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The DaylightGeneral subassembly is typically attached to the subassembly used at the outside edge of the roadway, such as the edge of shoulder, back of sidewalk, or back of curb. The attachment point is at the inside edge of the first Cut link, first Fill link, or Guardrail widening link.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

DaylightGeneral | 61

Parameter
Omit Daylight Link

Description
Includes or omits the Daylight link. Number of the Cut Link whose outside end is the test point for determining if the section is in cut or fill Width of link Cut 1 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 1 Width of link Cut 2 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 2 Width of link Cut 3 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 3 Width of link Cut 4 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 4 Width of link Cut 5 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 5 Width of link Cut 6 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 6 Width of link Cut 7 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 7

Type
True / False

Default
False

Cut Test Point

Numeric, positive, integer

Cut 1 Width Cut 1 Slope Cut 2 Width Cut 2 Slope Cut 3 Width Cut 3 Slope Cut 4 Width Cut 4 Slope Cut 5 Width Cut 5 Slope Cut 6 Width Cut 6 Slope Cut 7 Width Cut 7 Slope

Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

62 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Cut 8 Width Cut 8 Slope Flat Cut Slope

Description
Width of link Cut 8 Slope (x : 1) of link Cut 8 First, flattest, catch slope to attempt. Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Flat Cut Slope Cut slope to attempt if the Flat Cut Slope link exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Medium Cut Slope. Cut slope to use if the Medium Cut Slope link exceeds the Medium Cut Max Height. Width of link Fill 1 Slope (x : 1) of link Fill 1 Width of link Fill 2 Slope (x : 1) of link Fill 2 Width of link Fill 3 Slope (x : 1) of link Fill 3

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive

Default
0.0 0.0 6 ( : 1)

Flat Cut Max Height

Numeric, positive

1.5 m 5 ft

Medium Cut Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

Medium Cut Max Height

Numeric, positive

3m 10 ft

Steep Cut Slope

Numeric, positive

2 ( : 1)

Fill 1 Width Fill 1 Slope Fill 2 Width Fill 2 Slope Fill 3 Width Fill 3 Slope

Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric

0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

DaylightGeneral | 63

Parameter
Flat Fill Slope

Description
First, flattest, catch slope to attempt. (x : 1) Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Flat Fill Slope Fill slope to attempt if the Flat Fill Slope link exceeds the Flat Fill Max Height Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Medium Fill Slope Fill slope to use if the Medium Fill Slope link exceeds the Medium Fill Max Height Width of the guardrail widening link for fill slopes using Steep Fill Slope. Use zero for no guardrail widening. % slope of the guardrail widening link Include to insert links for the guardrail structure on the guardrail widening segment. Omit does not insert the guardrail structure. When the guardrail is included, the width from the attachment point to the inside edge of the guardrail post.

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
6 ( : 1)

Flat Fill Max Height

Numeric, positive

1.5 m 5 ft

Medium Fill Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

Medium Fill Max Height

Numeric, positive

3m 10 ft

Steep Fill Slope

Numeric, positive

2 ( : 1)

Guardrail Width

Numeric, positive

0.6 m 2 ft

Guardrail %Slope

Numeric

-2 (%)

Include Guardrail Omit Guardrail

Include / Omit

Omit

Width to Post

Numeric

0.3 m 1 ft

64 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Place Lined Material

Description
Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Type
String

Default
None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness

Numeric, positive

12 inches

Material 1 Name

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness

Numeric, positive

6 inches

Material 2 Name

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

DaylightGeneral | 65

Parameter
Material 3 Name

Description
Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
String

Default
Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Daylight Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly is designed to accommodate a wide variety of clear zone, cut section, and fill section configurations. It allows up to eight links to be used in cut sections from the edge-of-roadway to the cut intercept hinge point, and any one of these links can be used as the cut test point. Up to three fill links can be used out to the fill hinge point, and provides special guardrail shoulder widening for steep fill conditions. Cut links are denoted as Cut 1, Cut 2, up to Cut 8. The Cut Test Point input value indicates which cut link ends at the cut test point. The logical steps used are as follows: 1 The cut surface links are constructed temporarily from Cut 1 to the cut link ending at the test point. 2 If the test point, or any portion of the temporary surface, is below the target surface, the section is completed as a cut section. If the entire set of temporary links is above the target surface the section is completed as a fill section.

66 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

The cut example in the subassembly diagram show where five Cut links are defined. The cut test point is on the third link. The fill example shows two defined Fill links. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Cut Section:
1 If the cut test point is above the target surface, the links are traced backwards from the test point until an intersection with the target surface is found. The section is terminated at this point. 2 If the test point is below the target surface, the remaining cut links are added one by one. Each one is tested to see if it intersects the daylight surface. If so, the cut section terminates at the intersection point and the appropriate Hinge and Daylight codes are assigned. 3 To close to the target surface in cut:

If Include Daylight Link is set to False, no cut daylight intercept is calculated. The intercept to the daylight surface is calculated using the Flat Cut Slope value. If the height of the flat cut slope exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height, the intercept to the daylight surface is re-calculated using the Medium Cut Slope value. If the height of the medium cut slope exceeds the Medium Cut Max Height, the intercept to the daylight surface is re-calculated using the Steep Cut Slope value.

DaylightGeneral | 67

Fill Section
1 Fill links are inserted outward from the attachment point to the fill hinge point, which is the outer edge of the last non-zero fill link. 2 When a fill link intersects the daylight surface before reaching the hinge point, the section is terminated at the intersection and the appropriate Hinge and Daylight point codes are assigned. 3 To close to the target surface in fill:

The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat Fill Slope value. If the height of the intercept link does not exceed the Flat Fill Max Height, this slope is used to add the link to the assembly, otherwise: The intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the Medium Fill Slope value. If the height of the intercept link does not exceed the Medium Fill Max Height, this slope is used to add the link to the assembly, otherwise: If a non-zero guardrail width is given, the links (Fill 1, Fill 2 etc.) are removed. The guardrail widening link is added at the attachment point using the Guardrail Width and Guardrail %Slope parameters. The intercept to the target surface is re-calculated from the outside edge of the guardrail widening link using the Steep Fill Slope value, and the link is added to the assembly. If the guardrail width is zero, the steep fill slope is applied from the fill hinge point.

A guardrail structure may be applied to fill sections that meet the criteria for using the steep fill slope. If this criteria is met, the Guardrail Width is not zero, and Include Guardrail is set to true, then a guardrail structure is drawn at the station. The dimensions of the guardrail structure are fixed as shown in the diagram below.

68 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly shows both the cut and fill condition flat-slope solutions in dashed lines. The daylight link is extended outward for a horizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet, and terminates with an arrowhead.

DaylightGeneral | 69

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
CP(n+1)

Code
Ditch_Out

Description
Ditch test point at the end of Cut Link n, where n is the cut test point link number Hinge point for the cut intercept slope

CP (1 to n)

Hinge Hinge_Cut Daylight Daylight_Cut Hinge Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Fill Top Datum None

CP10

Cut slopestake point

FP (1 to n)

Hinge point for the fill intercept slope

FP5

Fill slopestake point

All links

All cut, fill, and guardrail links

Guardrail points

No codes are assigned to the points on the guardrail structure, if included. All links comprising the guardrail structure, if included. Daylight link for cut section

Guardrail links

Guardrail

Final daylight link

Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Final daylight link

Daylight link for fill section

70 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Coding Diagram

DaylightGeneral | 71

DaylightMaxOffset
Inserts a link that extends to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope. If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point within a maximum +/- offset from the baseline.

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

72 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly The slope for normal daylighting in cut conditions The slope for normal daylighting in fill conditions The maximum allowable offset for the daylight point Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Cut Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

Fill Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

Max Offset from Baseline Place Lined Material

Numeric

3.0 m 10.0 ft None

String

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness

Numeric, positive

12 inches

Material 1 Name

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

DaylightMaxOffset | 73

Parameter
Material 2 Thickness

Description
Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
6 inches

Material 2 Name

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

Material 3 Name

String

Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Max Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Max Offset value and tie the maximum offset to an offset alignment. Name of the daylighting surface.

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point. Elevation of the daylight point.

Type
Numeric Numeric

74 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition. If a daylight point is found, its offset is compared to the Max Offset value. If the Max Offset value is exceeded, the daylight point is moved to the maximum offset point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Max Offset during corridor modeling, the value of the Max Offset will vary to match the offset of the alignment. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashed lines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. The daylight links are terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

DaylightMaxOffset | 75

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Description
Hinge point, and hinge point for the cut or fill condition

P2

Daylight point, and daylight point for the cut or fill condition

L1

L1

Daylight link for cut section

L1

Daylight link for fill section

76 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Coding Diagram

DaylightMaxWidth
Inserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope. If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point within a maximum width from the hinge point.

DaylightMaxWidth | 77

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly The slope for normal daylighting in cut conditions

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Cut Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

78 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Fill Slope

Description
The slope for normal daylighting in fill conditions The maximum allowable width from the hinge point (attachment point) for the daylight point Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
4 ( : 1)

Max Width

Numeric

3.0 m 10.0 ft

Place Lined Material

String

None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness Material 1 Name

Numeric, positive String

12 inches Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness Material 2 Name

Numeric, positive String

6 inches Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness Material 3 Name

Numeric, positive String

4 inches Seeded Grass

DaylightMaxWidth | 79

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Max Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Max Width value and tie the maximum width to an offset alignment Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition. If a daylight point is found, the width of the daylight link is compared to the Max Width value. If the Max Width value is exceeded, the daylight point is moved to the maximum width point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Max Width during corridor modeling, the value of the Max Width will vary to match the offset of the alignment. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

80 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashed lines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. The daylight links are terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Description
Hinge point, and hinge point for the cut or fill condition

P2

Daylight point, and daylight point for the cut or fill condition

L1

L1

Daylight link for cut section

L1

Daylight link for fill section

DaylightMaxWidth | 81

Coding Diagram

DaylightMinOffset
Inserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope. If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point beyond a minimum offset from the baseline.

82 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

DaylightMinOffset | 83

Parameter
Cut Slope

Description
The slope for normal daylighting in cut conditions The slope for normal daylighting in fill conditions The minimum allowable offset for the daylight point Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
4 ( : 1)

Fill Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

Min Offset from Baseline Place Lined Material

Numeric

3.0 m 10.0 ft None

String

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness Material 1 Name

Numeric, positive

12 inches

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness Material 2 Name

Numeric, positive

6 inches

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

String

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

84 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Material 3 Name

Description
Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
String

Default
Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Min Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Min Offset and tie the minimum offset to an offset alignment Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition. If a daylight point is found, its offset is compared to the Min Offset value. If the daylight point is within the Min Offset, the daylight point is moved to the minimum offset point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Min Offset during corridor modeling, the value of the Min Offset will vary to match the offset of the alignment. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of

DaylightMinOffset | 85

links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashed lines extended outward for the Min Offset distance. The daylight links are terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape P1 Code Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum Top Daylight link for cut section Description Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condition

P2

Daylight point, and daylight point for either the cut or fill condition

L1

L1

86 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut L1 Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill Daylight link for fill section

Coding Diagram

DaylightMinWidth
Inserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope. If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point beyond a minimum width from the hinge point.

DaylightMinWidth | 87

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

88 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Cut Slope

Description
The slope for normal daylighting in cut conditions The slope for normal daylighting in fill conditions The minimum allowable offset for the daylight point Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric

Default
4 ( : 1)

Fill Slope

4 ( : 1)

Min Width

3.0 m 10.0 ft None

Place Lined Material

String

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness Material 1 Name

Numeric, positive String

12 inches

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness Material 2 Name

Numeric, positive String

6 inches

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

DaylightMinWidth | 89

Parameter
Material 3 Name

Description
Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
String

Default
Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Min Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Min Width and tie the minimum width to an offset alignment Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition. If a daylight point is found, the width of the daylight link is compared to the Min Width value. If the daylight point is within the Min Width, the daylight point is moved to the minimum width point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Min Width during corridor modeling, the value of the Min Width will vary to match the offset of the alignment. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

90 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashed lines extended outward for the Min Width distance. The daylight links are terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum

Description
Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condition

P2

Daylight point, and daylight point for either the cut or fill condition

L1

DaylightMinWidth | 91

Point, Link, or Shape


L1

Code
Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Description
Daylight link for cut section

L1

Daylight link for fill section

Coding Diagram

DaylightMultiIntercept
This subassembly is used when a cut or fill daylight slope may have more than one intersection with the target surface. An input parameter controls which intercept is used.

92 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side Cut Slope

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly The slope for normal daylighting in cut conditions

Type
Left / Right Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
Right 4 ( : 1)

Fill Slope

The slope for normal daylighting in fill conditions

4 ( : 1)

DaylightMultiIntercept | 93

Parameter
Intercept Number

Description
The number of the intercept to save. If the Intercept Number value is greater than the actual number of intercepts, the highest intercept found is used Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Type
Numeric, positive, integer

Default
10

Place Lined Material

String

None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness Material 1 Name Slope Limit 2

Numeric, positive String

12 inches

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Rip Rap

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness Material 2 Name Slope Limit 3

Numeric, positive String

6 inches

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Rip Rap

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness Material 3 Name

Numeric, positive String

4 inches

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Seeded Grass

94 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Daylight Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly attempts to find all possible daylight points for the cut slope condition. If one or more daylight points are found, they are ordered and numbered by increasing offset from the hinge point. The daylight link is terminated at the point that matches the Intercept Number value. If the intercept number is higher than the number of intercepts found, the last intercept is used. If no daylight points are found for the cut condition, the process is repeated for the fill condition. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

DaylightMultiIntercept | 95

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill solutions in dashed lines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. The daylight links terminate in arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Description
Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condition

P2

Daylight point, and daylight point for either the cut or fill condition

L1

Daylight link for cut section

L1

Daylight link for fill section

96 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Coding Diagram

DaylightStandard
This subassembly creates corridor-side daylighting links with user-defined slope configurations, such as flat, medium, and maximum slopes for cut and fill situations. This subassembly creates either a v-shaped or flat- bottom ditch in cut situations, and includes an option to include guard rail widening for steep fill conditions. The final daylighting link can be omitted for cases where the corridor model needs to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway.

DaylightStandard | 97

98 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
This subassembly is typically attached to the subassembly used at the outside edge of the roadway, such as the edge of shoulder, back of sidewalk, or back of curb. The attachment point is at the inside edge of the ditch front link, the top of the flat or medium fill slope, or inside edge of guardrail widening link, depending on conditions.

DaylightStandard | 99

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Include or omit the Daylight link.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Include Daylight Link Omit Daylight Link Flat Cut Slope

Include / Omit

Include

First, flattest, catch slope to attempt. (x : 1) Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Flat Cut Slope Cut slope to attempt if the Flat Cut Slope link exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Medium Cut Slope Cut slope to use if the Medium Cut Slope link exceeds the Medium Cut Max Height For cut sections, the width of the front-of-ditch link Slope of the front-of-ditch link (x : 1). This link is always inserted downwards.

Numeric, positive Numeric

6 ( : 1)

Flat Cut Max Height

1.5 m 5 ft

Medium Cut Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

Medium Cut Max Height

Numeric

3m 10 ft

Steep Cut Slope

Numeric, positive

2 ( : 1)

Foreslope Width

Numeric

3.6 m 12 ft 4 ( : 1)

Foreslope Slope

Numeric, positive

100 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Ditch Width

Description
Width of the bottom of ditch. Use zero for a V-ditch. First, flattest, catch slope to attempt. (x : 1) Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Flat Fill Slope Fill slope to attempt if the Flat Fill Slope link exceeds the Flat Fill Max Height Maximum allowable height of the closing link using the Medium Fill Slope Fill slope to use if the Medium Fill Slope link exceeds the Medium Fill Max Height Width of the guardrail widening link for fill slopes using Steep Fill Slope. Use zero for no guardrail widening. % slope of the guardrail widening link Include to insert the guardrail structure when guardrail widening occurs. Omit does not insert the guardrail structure. When the guardrail is included, the width from the attachment

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric

Default
1m 3 ft 6 ( : 1)

Flat Fill Slope

Flat Fill Max Height

1.5 m 5 ft

Medium Fill Slope

Numeric, positive

4 ( : 1)

Medium Fill Max Height

Numeric

3m 10 ft

Steep Fill Slope

Numeric, positive

2 ( : 1)

Guardrail Width

Numeric, positive

0.6 m 2 ft

Guardrail %Slope

Numeric

-2 (%)

Include Guardrail Omit Guardrail

Include / Omit

Omit

Width to Post

Numeric

0.3 m 1 ft

DaylightStandard | 101

Parameter

Description
point to the inside edge of the guardrail post.

Type

Default

Place Lined Material

Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

String

None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness

Numeric, positive String

12 inches

Material 1 Name

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness

Numeric, positive String

6 inches

Material 2 Name

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive

4 inches

102 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Material 3 Name

Description
Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Type
String

Default
Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Daylight Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
The following steps are used by this subassembly to determine which conditions apply: 1 The location of the Cut Test Point (see diagram) is calculated using the Foreslope Width, Foreslope Slope, and Ditch Width parameters. 2 If any portion of the foreslope slope or ditch bottom is in cut, the section is computed as a cut section as follows:

If the Cut Test Point is above the target surface, the Foreslope link or ditch bottom is truncated at the point where it intersects the surface going from cut to fill, otherwise:

DaylightStandard | 103

If Include Daylight Link is set to omit, no daylight link is calculated. The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat Cut Slope value. If the height of the flat cut slope exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height, the intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the Medium Cut Slope value. If the height of the medium cut slope exceeds the Medium Cut Max Height, the intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the Steep Cut Slope value.

3 If no portion of the foreslope link or ditch bottom is below the target surface, the section is computed as a Fill section as follows:

The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat Fill Slope value. If the height of the flat fill slope exceeds the Flat Fill Max Height, the intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the Medium Fill Slope value. If the height of the medium fill slope exceeds the Medium Fill Max Height, the guardrail widening link is added to the assembly using the Guardrail Width and Guardrail %Slope parameters (unless the Guardrail Width is zero). The intercept to the target surface is re-calculated from the putside edge of the guardrail widening link using the Steep Fill Slope value. If Include Daylight Link is True, the flat, medium, or steep fill slope link is added to the assembly.

A guardrail structure may be applied to fill sections that meet the criteria for using the steep fill slope. If this criteria is met, the Guardrail Width is not zero, and Include Guardrail is set to true, then a guardrail structure is drawn at the

104 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

station. The dimensions of the guardrail structure are fixed as shown in the diagram below.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly shows both the cut and fill flat-slope conditions. The daylight links are extended outward for a horizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet, and are shown in dashed lines terminating in arrowheads pointing outwards.

DaylightStandard | 105

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Fill Hinge Hinge_Fill Ditch_In

Description
Hinge point for the normal fill condition

P2

Hinge point for the fill condition with guardrail widening Inside edge of the bottom of the ditch (cut condition only) Outside edge of the bottom of the ditch (cut condition only)

P2

P3

Ditch_Out Hinge Hinge_Cut Daylight Daylight_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum None

P3

Fill slopestake point (fill condition only)

P4

Cut slopestake point (cut condition only)

All Links

All links added by this subassembly, except for the guardrail structure links. No codes are assigned to the points on the guardrail strucure, if included. All links comprising the guardrail strucure, if included. Daylight link for cut section

Guardrail points

Guardrail links

Guardrail

L3

Top

106 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape

Code
Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut

Description

Fill Daylight Link

Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Daylight link for fill section

Coding Diagram

DaylightStandard | 107

DaylightToOffset
Inserts a daylight link from the attachment point to a given offset from the baseline.

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the daylight link.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. Parameter
Daylight Offset from Baseline Place Lined Material

Description
+/- offset of the daylight point from the baseline Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

String

None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

Material 1 Thickness

Numeric, positive

12 inches

108 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Material 1 Name

Description
Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Type
String

Default
Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness

Numeric, positive String

6 inches

Material 2 Name

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive String

4 inches

Material 3 Name

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Daylight Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Daylight Offset and tie the daylight offset to an offset alignment Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset

Description
Offset of the daylight point

Type
Numeric

DaylightToOffset | 109

Parameter
Daylight Elevation

Description
Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric

Behavior
A daylight ink is inserted from the attachment point to the surface at the given offset. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays a link extending outwards at a -4 : 1 slope to the specified offset. The daylight link terminates with an arrowhead pointing outwards.

110 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

Description
Hinge point. Hinge_Cut is used if the daylight link has an upward slope; Hinge_Fill is used if the daylight link has a downward slope. Daylight point

P2

L1

Daylight link for cut section

L1

Daylight link for fill section

Coding Diagram

DaylightToROW
Inserts a daylight link from the attachment point to a given offset from the right-of-way limit on a target surface.

DaylightToROW | 111

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the daylight link.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. Parameter
ROW Offset from Baseline

Description
+/- offset of the right-of-way limit from the baseline +/- value added to the ROW Limit Offset. A negative adjustment value moves the daylight point inside of the ROW limit; a positive value moves it outside the ROW limit. Specifies to place optional material lining along daylight links. You can choose All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None. Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Offset Adjustment

Numeric

0.0

Place Lined Material

String

None

Slope Limit 1

Slope

1:1

112 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Material 1 Thickness

Description
Specifies the thickness of lined material

Type
Numeric, positive String

Default
12 inches

Material 1 Name

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 2

Slope

2:1

Material 2 Thickness

Numeric, positive String

6 inches

Material 2 Name

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links Specifies the slope limit until which the associated material lining is placed Specifies the thickness of lined material

Rip Rap

Slope Limit 3

Slope

4:1

Material 3 Thickness

Numeric, positive String

4 inches

Material 3 Name

Specifies the name of the material applies for lining along garding links

Seeded Grass

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
ROW Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed ROW Offset and tie the ROW offset to an offset alignment Name of the daylighting surface

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Required

DaylightToROW | 113

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Offset of the daylight point Elevation of the daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
The daylight offset is calculated as the ROW Limit Offset plus or minus the Offset Adjustment. A daylight link is inserted from the attachment point to the calculated offset on the target surface. Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied. If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are added to the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are coded with Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by these materials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays a link extending outwards at a -4 : 1 slope to the right-of-way offset, plus or minus the offset adjustment. The daylight link terminates with an arrowhead pointing outwards.

114 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1

Code
Hinge Hinge_Cut or Hinge_Fill

Description
Hinge point. Hinge_Cut is used if the daylight link has an upward slope; Hinge_Fill is used if the daylight link has a downward slope. Daylight point

P2

Daylight Daylight_Cut or Daylight_Fill Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Cut Top Datum Daylight Daylight_Fill

L1

Daylight link for cut section

L1

Daylight link for fill section

Coding Diagram

GenericPavementStructure
This subassembly creates a simple pavement structure with user-definable point, link, and shape codes.

GenericPavementStructure | 115

This subassembly can be used as a lane or shoulder using superelevation parameters for the slope. The width and outside edge elevation can be calculated based on an optional alignment and profile. This subassembly can be stacked one below another to form multiple layers, or butted side by side to form multiple lanes with or without grade breaks. If multiple GenericPavementStructure subassemblies are stacked, the bottom slope can be used as the top slope of subsequent layers. Optionally, the bottom width of the subsequent subassembly can be assigned as the width of the previous subassembly.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the upper inside edge of the pavement structure.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Width of the subassembly. Specifies optional additional width to add. Default slope of the top link, when superelevation slope for the alignment is not specified.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width Shift Width

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft 0.2 m 0.67 ft

Default Cross Slope

Numeric

-2%

116 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Use Superelevation Slope

Description
Specifies to use slope from superelevation specification defined on the baseline alignment.

Type
List of options (a) No, (b) Outside lane slope, (c) Inside lane slope, (d) Outside shoulder slope, (e) Inside shoulder slope Numeric, positive

Default
No

Depth

Depth from top link to the bottom link of the subassembly. Indicates to deflect outside vertical face to a specified slope. Specifies the slope of the outer edge if choose not to be vertical. Specifies point codes to the inside point on the top link. Specifies point codes to the outside point on the top link. Specifies point codes to the outside point on the bottom link. Specifies point codes to the inside point on the bottom link. Specifies codes to the top link. Specifies codes to the top link.

0.2 m 0.67 ft

Deflect Outer Vertical Face Outer Edge Slope

Boolean Yes/No

No

Numeric

1:1

Inside-Top Point Codes Outside-Top Point Codes Outside-Bottom Point Codes Inside-Bottom Point Codes Top Link Codes Bottom Link Codes Right Link Codes Left Link Codes

String

String

String

String

String String

Specifies codes to the top link. Specifies codes to the top link.

String String

GenericPavementStructure | 117

Parameter
Shape Codes

Description
Specifies codes for the enclosed shape of the structure.

Type
String

Default

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed width and tie the point on the top link which defines width to an offset alignment. May be used to override the fixed slope and tie the point on the top link which defines width to an offset profile.

Status
Optional

Edge Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Total width of the top link including the effective shift width. Total bottom width of the pavement structure including the shift width and width due to the deflected outer face. Depth from top link to the bottom Cross slope of the structure.

Type
Left / Right

Top Width

Numeric, positive

Bottom Width

Numeric, positive

Depth Cross Slope

Numeric, positive Numeric

118 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Behavior
This subassembly builds a skeletal subassembly that lets you specify various parameters. All point, link, and shape codes can be user-defined as needed. Additionally, this subassembly can get slopes from a runtime logical assignments (profile), or from the superelevation specified on the alignment. It can also assign the width from an offset alignment. While defining an assembly, you can assign the width of the previous subassembly (the one above), plus a shift width to the subassembly, so that stepped layers are possible.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the subassembly draws the lane using the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LaneBrokenBack
Creates a cross-sectional representation of travel lanes for a broken-back roadway, where the inside and outside lanes have different downward slopes. This subassembly is used for the inside lanes on divided, broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows the standards described in Pavement Structure on Paved Sections in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

LaneBrokenBack | 119

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies that inside edge of travelway to be coded as Crown Width of the inside lanes

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Crown Point on Inside

Yes / No

No

Inside Width

Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft - 2.0 (%)

Inside Default %Slope

Default % Slope of the inside lanes to be used if the superelevation for the alignment is not defined Width of the outside lanes

Numeric

Outside Width

Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft

120 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Outside Default %Slope

Description
Default % Slope of the outside lanes to be used if the superelevation for the alignment is not defined Thickness of the Pave1 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Pave2 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Base layer

Type
Numeric

Default
- 2.0 (%)

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, postiive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the Subbase layer

Numeric, positive

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Inside Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Inside Width and tie the edge-of-inside-lane to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Outside Width and tie the edge-of-outside-lane to an offset alignment May be used to override the normal slope and tie the elevation of the edge-of-insidelane to the elevation of a profile May be used to override the normal slope and tie the elevation of the edge-of-outsidelane to the elevation of a profile

Status
Optional

Outside Width

Alignment

Optional

Inside Elevation

Profile

Optional

Outside Elevation

Profile

Optional

LaneBrokenBack | 121

Output Parameters
Parameter
Inside %Slope Outside %Slope

Description
% slope of the inside lane % slope of the outside lane

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly creates a set of inside lanes and outside lanes that may have different slopes. The inside lanes are inserted outwards from the attachment point using the Inside Lane superelevation slope. If the superelevation is not defined at a station, the Inside Default %Slope value is used. The outside lanes are inserted outward from the end of the inside lanes, using the outside lane superelevation slope, or the Outside Default %Slope. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subasssembly displays the finish, base, and subbase links for the given widths and depths at the default % slopes.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1, P3 P1 P2 P4, P6 P4 P5

Code
ETW Crown Lane ETW_Pave1 Crown_Pave1 Lane_Pave1

Description
Edges of lane on finish grade Crown point of the corridor (optional) Lane breakpoint on finish grade Edges of lane on Pave1 Crown point on Pave1 (optional) Lane break point on Pave1

122 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape


P7, P9 P7 P8 P10, P12 P10 P11 P13, P15 P13 P14 L1, L2 L3, L4 L5, L6 L7, L8 L9, L10

Code
ETW_Pave2 Crown_Pave2 Lane_Pave2 ETW_Base Crown_Base Lane_Base ETW _Sub Crown_Sub Lane_Sub Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base SubBase Datum Pave1 Pave2 Base

Description
Edges of lane on Pave2 Crown point on Pave2 (optional) Lane break point on Pave2 Edges of lane on the Base layer Crown point on base layer (optional) Lane break point on the Base layer Edges of lane on the Subbase layer Crown point on subbase layer (optional) Lane break point on the Subbase layer Finish grade surface

S1 S2 S3

LaneBrokenBack | 123

Point, Link, or Shape


S4

Code
Subbase

Description

Coding Diagram

LaneFromTaperedMedian1
Inserts one or more travel lanes outward at a constant grade from an alignment that defines the edge of a median that tapers to allow for left-turn lanes. The alignment defining the edge of the median may at times be either not present (Case 1), outside the roadway centerline (Case 2), or inside of the centerline (Case 3). To use this subassembly you should have separate alignments defining the left and right edges of the median. It may be necessary to define separate corridor model regions for each individual median.

124 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 125

Attachment
The attachment point is at the location where the inside edge-of-traveled-way would be if there was no median. This is typically at the assembly baseline, but may be at any marker point on the assembly.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of the lane for the condition where there is no median; that is, from the attachment point to the outside edge-of-traveled-way. % slope of the lanes. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Lane Width

Numeric

3.6 m 12.0 ft

%Slope

String

LO

126 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter

Description
specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope LO: outside lane slope

Type

Default

Inside Adjustment

Used if the Median Edge alignment is at a fixed offset from the actual edgeof-traveled-way (for example, at the back of curb). Adjusts the calculated Lane Width to account for the offset (see diagram). Used if the Outside Lane Width alignment is at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way (for example, at the back of curb). Adjusts the calculated Lane Width to account for the offset (see diagram). Depth between finish grade and Pave1 Depth between Pave1 and Pave2 Depth between Pave1 and Base Depth of the Subbase layer at the attachment point

Numeric, positive

0.0

Outside Adjustment

Numeric, positive

0.0

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, postiive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

Subbase Depth

Numeric

LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 127

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Median Edge

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to shift the starting offset of the lane to follow an edge-of-median alignment May be used to shift the ending offset of the lane to follow an edge-of-lane alignment May be used to override the normal lane slope and tie the outer edge of the travel lane to the elevation of a profile

Status
Optional

Lane Width

Alignment

Optional

Outside Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the lane

Type
Numeric

Behavior
Outside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The width to the outside edge-of-traveled-way can be defined by a fixed numeric width, or an alignment can be used to override the width. The elevation is determined by applying the specified slope for the width of the lane, unless an Outside Elevation profile is given. In that case, the outside edge elevation is tied to the profile, and the slope is adjusted. The location of the inside edge-of-traveled-way is calculated based on the three cases shown in the preceding diagram. If no Median Edge alignment is given, or the given one is not found at a station, the inside edge is held at the attachment point (Case 1). If a Median Edge alignment is given, and that alignment is outside the lanes attachment point, the inside edge is shifted outward from the attachment point at lane slope (Case 2). If the Median Edge alignment is inside the lanes attachment point, the inside edge is shifted inward from the attachment point at the lane slope (Case 3).

128 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Inside and Outside Adjustments: The Inside Adjustment and Outside Adjustment parameters are provided in case the alignment used for the median edge or lane edge is at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way. For example, the alignment being used for the Median Edge may be at the back-of-curb instead of at the pavement edge. In this case the Inside Adjustment parameter should be set to the width of the curb.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the lane for the given width and slope. If a superelevation slope is given (LI or LO), the links are displayed at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1, P2 P3, P4 P5, P6 P7, P8 P9, P10 L1 L2

Code
ETW ETW_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 ETW_Base ETW _Sub Top, Pave Pave1

Description
Edges of lane on finish grade Edges of lane on Pave1 layer Edges of lane on Pave2 layer Edges of lane on Base layer Edges of lane on Subbase layer Finish grade surface Pave1 surface

LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 129

Point, Link, or Shape


L3 L4 L5 S1 S2 S3 S4

Code
Pave2 Base SubBase, Datum Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Description
Pave2 surface Base surface Subbase surface Area between finish grade and Pave1 Area between Pave1 and Pave2 Area between Pave2 and Base Area between Base and Subbase

Coding Diagram

LaneFromTaperedMedian2
Inserts one or more travel lanes outward from an alignment that defines the edge of a median.

130 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

The alignment defining the edge of the median may at times be either not present (Case 1), outside the roadway centerline (Case 2), or inside the centerline (Case 3). To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining the left and right edges of the median. It may be necessary to define separate corridor model regions for each individual median. This subassembly differs from LaneFromTaperedMedian1 in that it provides for a grade break with different slopes in the travel lanes.

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 131

Attachment
The attachment point is at the location where the inside edge-of-traveled-way would be if there was no median. This is typically at the assembly baseline.

132 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates the outward direction of the lane Width of the inside lane for the condition where there is no median; that is, from the attachment point to the grade break point. % slope of the inside lanes, in the outward direction. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope LO: outside lane slope Width from the grade break point to the outside edge-of-traveled-way. % slope of the outside lanes, in the outward direction. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Inside Lane Width

Numeric

3.6 m 12.0 ft

Inside %Slope

String

LI

Outside Lane Width

Numeric

3.6 m 12.0 ft

Outside %Slope

String

LO

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 133

Parameter

Description
LI: inside lane slope LO: outside lane slope

Type

Default

Inside Adjustment

Used if the Median Edge alignment is at a fixed offset from the actual edgeof-traveled-way (for example, at the back of curb). Adjusts the calculated Inside Lane Width to account for the offset (see diagram). Used if the Outside Lane Width alignment is at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way (for example, at the back of curb). Adjusts the calculated Outside Lane Width to account for the offset (see diagram). Depth between finish grade and Pave1 Depth between Pave1 and Pave2 Depth between Pave1 and Base Depth of the Subbase layer at the attachment point

Numeric, positive

0.0

Outside Adjustment

Numeric, positive

0.0

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, postiive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

Subbase Depth

Numeric

Note that if the Inside %Slope value is always the same as Outside %Slope, or if Inside Lane Width is zero, then the simpler LaneFromTaperedMedian1 subassembly can be used instead.

134 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Median Edge

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to shift the starting offset of the lane to follow an edge-of-median alignment May be used to override the fixed Inside Lane Width and tie the grade break to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Outside Lane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment May be used to override the normal lane slope and tie the outer edge of the travel lane to the elevation of a profile

Status
Optional

Inside Lane Width

Alignment

Optional

Outside Lane Width

Alignment

Optional

Outside Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Inside Lane %Slope Outside Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the inside lane % slope of the outside lane

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
Grade Break: The width from the attachment point outwards to the grade break between the inside and outside lanes can be defined by a fixed numeric width, or an alignment can be used to override the width. The elevation at the grade break is determined by applying the specified slope for the inside lane across the width of the lane. Outside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The width to the outside edge-of-traveled-way can be defined by a fixed numeric width, or an alignment can be used to override the width. The elevation is determined by applying the specified slope for the width of the lane, unless an Outside Elevation profile is given.

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 135

In that case, the outside edge elevation is tied to the profile, and the slope is adjusted. Inside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The location of the inside edge-of-traveled-way is calculated based on the three cases shown in the previous diagram. If a Median Edge alignment is given, and that alignment is outside of the lanes attachment point, the inside edge is shifted outward from the attachment point at the lane slope (Case 2). If the Median Edge alignment is inside of the lanes attachment point, the inside edge is shifted inward from the attachment point at the inside lane slope (Case 3). If no Median Edge alignment is given, or the given one is not found at a station, the inside edge is held at the attachment point (Case 1). Inside and Outside Adjustments: The Inside Adjustment and Outside Adjustment parameters are provided in case the alignments used for the inside or outside edges are at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way. For example, the alignment being used for the Median Edge may be at the back-of-curb instead of at the pavement edge. In this case, the Inside Adjustment parameter should be set to the width of the curb.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the lanes for the given widths and slopes. If a superelevation slope is given (LI or LO), the links are displayed at a slope of -2%.

136 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1, P3 P4, P6 P7, P9 P10, P12 P13, P15 P2 P5 P8 P11 P14 L1, L2 L3, L4 L5, L6 L7, L8 L9, L10 S1 S2

Code
ETW ETW_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 ETW_Base ETW _Sub Crown Crown_Pave1 Crown_Pave2 Crown_Base Crown_Subbase Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base SubBase, Datum Pave1 Pave2

Description
Edges of lane on finish grade Edges of lane on Pave1 layer Edges of lane on Pave2 layer Edges of lane on Base layer Edges of lane on Subbase layer Crown (grade break) on finish grade Crown (grade break) on Pave1 Crown (grade break) on Pave2 Crown (grade break) on Base Crown (grade break) on Subbase Finish grade surface Pave1 surface Pave2 surface Base surface Subbase surface Area between finish grade and Pave1 Area between Pave1 and Pave2

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 137

Point, Link, or Shape


S3 S4

Code
Base Subbase

Description
Area between Pave2 and Base Area between Base and Subbase

Coding Diagram

LaneInsideSuper
Creates a cross-sectional representation of finish grade, base layer, and subbase layer for a travel lane, applying the Inside Lane superelevation slope value for the corridor models baseline alignment. It is used for the inside lanes on divided, broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows the standards described in Pavement Structure on Paved Sections in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

138 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies that inside edge of travelway to be coded as Crown Width of the lane from the offset of the inside edge to the offset of the outside edge Default % Slope of the lane to be used when the superelevation slope of the alignment is not defined

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Crown Point on Inside

Yes / No

No

Width

Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft

Default %Slope

Numeric

-2.0

LaneInsideSuper | 139

Parameter
Pave1 Depth

Description
Thickness of the Pave1 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Pave2 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Base layer

Type
Numeric, postiive

Default
0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the Subbase layer

Numeric, positive

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed lane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment May be used to override the normal lane slope and tie the outer edge of the travel lane to the elevation of a profile

Status
Optional

Outside Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the lane

Type
Numeric

Behavior
The Inside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevation specifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, a finish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width, depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at either end of the lane.

140 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subasssembly displays the lane links using the given width and depths at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 P1 P2 P3 P3 P4 P5 P5 P6

Code
ETW Crown Lane ETW_Pave1 Crown_Pave1 Lane_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 Crown_Pave2 Lane_Pave2

Description
Edge-of-traveled-way on finish grade Crown point on finish grade (optional) Outside edge of lane on finish grade Edge-of-traveled-way on the Pave1 layer Crown point on the Pave1 layer (optional) Outside edge of lane on the Pave1 layer Edge-of-traveled-way on the Pave2 layer Crown point on the Pave2 layer (optional) Outside edge of lane on the Pave2 layer

LaneInsideSuper | 141

Point, Link, or Shape


P7

Code
ETW_Base

Description
Edge-of-traveled-way edge of lane on the Base layer Crown point on base layer (optional) Outside edge of lane on the Base layer Edge-of-traveled-way edge of lane on the subbase layer Crown point on subbase layer (optional) Outside edge of lane on the Subbase layer Finish grade surface

P7 P8 P9

Crown_Base Lane_Base ETW _Sub

P9 P10

Crown_Sub Lane_Sub

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5

Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base SubBase Datum Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Base surface Subbase surface

S1 S2 S3 S4

142 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Coding Diagram

LaneOutsideSuper
Creates a cross-sectional representation of a travel lane, applying the Outside Lane superelevation slope value for the corridor models baseline alignment. It is used for most undivided roads, or divided roads with no lane slope break on either side. It may also be used for the outside lanes of divided crowned or broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows the standards described in Pavement Structure on Paved Sections in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

LaneOutsideSuper | 143

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies that inside edge of travelway to be coded as Crown

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Crown Point on Inside

Yes / No

No

144 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Width

Description
Width of the lane from the offset of the inside edge to the offset of the outside edge Thickness of the base layer

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
3.6 m 12.0 ft

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

0.100 m 0.333 ft -2.0%

Default %Slope

Default % Slope of the lane to be used when the superelevation slope for the alignment is not defined Thickness of the Pave1 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Pave2 layer (zero to omit). Thickness of the base layer

Numeric

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the subbase layer

Numeric, positive

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed lane Width and tie the edge-oflane to an offset alignment. May be used to override the normal lane slope and tie the outer edge of the travel lane to the elevation of a profile.

Status
Optional

Outside Elevation

Profile name

Optional

LaneOutsideSuper | 145

Output Parameters
Parameter
Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the lane

Type
Numeric

Behavior
The Outside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevation specifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, a finish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width, depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at either end of the lane. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all lane links using the width and depth input parameters at a -2% slope.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7

Code
Crown ETW Crown_Pave1 ETW_Pave1 Crown_Pave2 ETW_Pave2 Crown_Base

Description
Crown point on finish grade (optional) Inside edge of lane on finish grade Crown point on the Pave1 layer (optional) Inside edge of lane on Pave. Crown point on the Pave2 layer (optional) Inside edge of lane on Pave2 Crown point on base grade (optional)

146 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape


P8 P9 P10 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5

Code
ETW_Base Crown_Sub ETW_Sub Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase Datum Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Description
Inside edge of lane on Base Crown point on subbase grade (optional) Inside edge of lane on Subbase Finish grade surface Pave1 surface Pave2 surface Base surface Subbase surface

S1 S2 S3 S4

Area between finish grade and Pave1 Area between Pave1 and Pave2 Area between Pave2 and Base Area between Base and Subbase

Coding Diagram

LaneOutsideSuper | 147

LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening
This subassembly inserts a travel lane, applying the Outside Lane superelevation slope value, and widens the pavement at superelevated regions. It can be used for most undivided roads, or divided roads with no lane slope break on either side. It may also be used for the outside lanes of divided crowned or broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows the standards described in Pavement Structure on Paved Sections in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help. The only difference between this subassembly and the LaneOutsideSuper subassembly is that this subassembly also widens the pavement width in superelevated regions of the corridor.

148 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of the lane from the offset of the inside edge to the offset of the outside edge Default % slope of the lane to be used when the superelevation slope for the alignment is not defined Thickness of the Pave1 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Pave2 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the base layer

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft

Default %Slope

Numeric

-2.0

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft 10 m 33 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the subbase layer

Numeric, positive

Wheelbase Length

Length of the vehicle wheelbase, including front overhang

Numeric, positive

LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening | 149

Parameter
Number of Travel Lanes

Description
Number of planned travel lanes in this subassembly

Type
Integer, positive

Default
1

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed lane Width and tie the edge-oflane to an offset alignment May be used to override the normal lane slope and tie the outer edge of the travel lane to the elevation of a profile

Status
Optional

Outside Elevation

Profile name

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the lane

Type
Numeric

Behavior
The Outside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevation specifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, a finish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width, depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at either end of the lane. Lane Widening If the current station is within a superelevated region, then the lane width value is calculated as follows: Width = Default Width + Pavement Widening where Pavement Widening =

150 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

n = Number of lanes R = Radius of the alignment at full superelevation L = Length of wheelbase including the front overhang The lane should be widened starting from the "End Normal Crown" and by the time "full super" station lane should be "default width + pavement widening". If spirals are used, typically this widening transition length is equal to the length of the spiral. The key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows: 1 Set pavement widening to zero. 2 Get the default width from parameters. 3 Verify whether a station is in Superelevation zone or not. 4 If Yes, then find the radius of curvature at full super station (not current station). 5 Compute the pavement widening value from the equation mentioned in the spec (ExtraW). 6 Find out the station value of "End Normal Crown" in this region; and similarly find station value of "Full Super"; find the difference as length along alignment to distribute (L). 7 Now, divide ExtraW by L and get that factor RateW. 8 Now, for the current station, find the difference between "end normal crown" station and current station (DeltaL). 9 Now, multiply RateW by DeltaL to get DeltaW for the current station. 10 Now add this DeltaW to the default Width provided in the subassembly properties. 11 Hence, the new width at the current station is = Width+DeltaW. This DeltW is the only parameter (note that it is not an input parameter) that we could show in the following diagram.

LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening | 151

The preceding diagram is not accurate, but indicative. The black line represents centerline and the blue lines on left and right denotes edges of different lanes on right and left sides (after design). The light (gray) coloured lines in the diagram indicate original right and left edges. The deviation of the designed edges are due to provision of extra widening. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all lane links using the width and depth input parameters at a -2% slope.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P2 P4 P6 P8

Code
ETW ETW_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 ETW_Base

Description
Inside edge of lane on finish grade Inside edge of lane on Pave1. Inside edge of lane on Pave2 Inside edge of lane on Base

152 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape


P10 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 S1 S2 S3 S4

Code
ETW_Sub Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Description
Inside edge of lane on Subbase Finish grade surface Pave1 surface Pave2 surface Base surface Subbase surface Area between finish grade and Pave1 Area between Pave1 and Pave2 Area between Pave2 and Base Area between Base and Subbase

Coding Diagram

LaneParabolic
Creates a cross-sectional representation of finish grade, pavement, and subbase for urban, parabolic lanes between the left and right edges of traveled way.

LaneParabolic | 153

The parabolic shape is simulated by a series of short, straight-line links. No superelevation is applied to the travel lanes. The pavement structure follows the standards described in Pavement Structure on Paved Sections in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the crown of road on the finish grade surface. This component is symmetrical about the attachment point.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Crown Height

Description
Height from the center point of the string line to the crown of road Width of the roadway from the left edge-of-traveled-way to the right edge-of-traveled-way Depth between the finish grade and the Pave1 surface Depth between the Pave1 and Pave2 surfaces

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
0.10 m 0.3333 ft. 7.2 m 24.0 ft

Width

Numeric, positive

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

154 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Base Depth

Description
Depth between the Pave2 and Base surfaces Depth between the Base and Subbase surfaces % slope of the string line from the left ETW to the right ETW Number of straight line increments simulating the parabolic shape

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft 0 (%)

Subbase Depth

Numeric, positive

%Slope

Numeric

No. Increments

Numeric, positive, even

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The center of the string line is calculated by subtracting the Crown Height from the attachment point, and the left and right edges-of-traveled-way are calculated by applying the Width and Slope symmetrically about the attachment point. The ordinates of the parabolic curve are calculated at even intervals along the string line, and straight line links are added to connect the ordinate points. Parallel surfaces are inserted for the Pave1, Pave2, Base, and Subbase surfaces from the given depths.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the lane links calculated from the given input parameters.

LaneParabolic | 155

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape Code
ETW ETW_Pave1

Description
Outside edges of lane on finish grade Outside edges of lane on the Base surface Outside edges of lane on subbase Crown point on finish grade Crown point on Pave1 Crown point on Pave2 Crown point on Base Crown point on subbase Finish grade

ETW_Pave2 Crown Crown_Pave1 Crown_Pave2 Crown_Base Crown_Sub Top Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base SubBase Datum S1 S2 Pave1 Pave2

Pave1 surface Pave2 surface Base surface Subbase surface

Area between finish grade and Pave1 Area between Pave1 and Pave2

156 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape


S3 S4

Code
Base Subbase

Description
Area between Pave2 and Base Area between Base and Subbase

Coding Diagram

LaneTowardCrown
Creates a cross-sectional representation of a travel lane that is being inserted from the inside edge of pavement towards the crown point. It uses the Outside Lane superelevation slope value for the corridor models baseline alignment. The pavement structure follows the standards described in Pavement Structure on Paved Sections in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

LaneTowardCrown | 157

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface. This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of the lane from the offset of the inside edge to the offset of the outside edge Thickness of the Pave1 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Pave2 layer (zero to omit) Thickness of the Base layer

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric, positive

3.6 m 12.0 ft

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, postiive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Numeric, positive

Base Depth

Numeric, positive

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the Subbase layer

Numeric, positive

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed lane Width value and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

158 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Parameter
Crown Elevation

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the normal lane slope and tie the outer edge of the travel lane to the elevation of a profile

Status
Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the lane

Type
Numeric

Behavior
The Inside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevation specifications for the baseline alignment, and the algebraic sign of this value is reversed. If inserting to the left, the Right Outside Lane Slope is obtained and reversed; if inserting to the right, the Left Outside Lane Slope is obtained and reversed. Starting at the attachment point, a finish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width, depth, and the reverse superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at either end of the lane. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the finish, base, and subbase links for the given width and depths at a -2% slope.

LaneTowardCrown | 159

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1 P2

Code
ETW Crown

Description
Inside edge of lane on finish grade Outside edge of lane (at the crown point) on finish grade Inside edge of lane on Pave1 Outside edge of lane on Pave1 Inside edge of lane on Pave2 Outside edge of lane on Pave2 Inside edge of lane on the base layer Outside edge of lane on the base layer Inside edge of lane on the subbase layer Outside edge of lane on the subbase layer Finish grade surface

P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5

ETW_Pave1 Crown_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 Crown_Pave2 ETW_Base Crown_Base ETW_Sub Crown_Sub Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase Datum Pave1

S1

160 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Point, Link, or Shape


S2 S3 S4

Code
Pave2 Base Subbase

Description

Coding Diagram

LaneTowardCrown | 161

Subassembly Reference (continued)

2
In this chapter

LinkMulti LinkOffsetAndElevation LinkOffsetAndSlope LinkOffsetOnSurface LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection LinkSlopesBetweenPoints LinkSlopeToElevation LinkSlopeToSurface LinkToMarkedPoint LinkVertical LinkWidthAndSlope MarkPoint MedianDepressed MedianDepressedShoulderExt MedianDepressedShoulderVert MedianFlushWithBarrier MedianRaisedConstantSlope MedianRaisedWithCrown OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges

163

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters OverlayCrownBetweenEdges OverlayMedianAsymmetrical OverlayMedianSymmetrical OverlayMillAndLevel1 OverlayMillAndLevel2 OverlayParabolic OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 OverlayWidenWithSuper1

164 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

LinkMulti
This subassembly is a general purpose subassembly to add a series of connected links. This is typically used to add structural shapes that are not pre-defined as subassemblies. Up to 12 links may be specified. If a shape requires more than 12 links, the LinkMulti subassembly can be used multiple times.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the first link. The subassembly is sensitive to the direction being inserted. Positive widths increase the offset from the attachment point in the direction inserted.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly The number of links used to draw the shape A list of codes to be assigned to the link

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

No. of Links

Numeric, positive integer Comma-separated string

Link Codes

Top, Datum

LinkMulti | 165

Parameter
dW1

Description
+/- width of the first link. Positive widths are in the direction of insertion. +/- vertical deflection of the first link +/- width of the 2nd link +/- vertical deflection of the 2nd link ...

Type
Numeric

Default
0

dZ1

Numeric

dW2 dZ2

Numeric Numeric

0 0

... (links 3 11) dW12 dZ12

Numeric

+/- width of the 12th link +/- vertical deflection of the 12th link

Numeric Numeric

0 0

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
Up to 12 links are inserted in sequence at the given widths and vertical deflections. Shapes are not automatically closed; a closing link must be included.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links defined by the input parameters.

166 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram
Points are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the first link from 1 up to 13. Links are numbered sequentially from 1 up to 12.

LinkOffsetAndElevation
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from the attachment point to a specified offset and elevation. An alignment can be substituted for the offset, and a profile for the elevation.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The direction of the link is determined by the location of the given offset and elevation relative to the attachment point.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Offsetfrom Baseline

Description
+/- offset of the end of the link

Type
Numeric

Default
3.0 m 10.0 ft

LinkOffsetAndElevation | 167

Parameter
Elevation Point Codes

Description
Elevation at the end of the link A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of codes to be assigned to the link Add the link, the start point, and the end point, or omit the link and add the end point only.

Type
Numeric Comma-separated string Comma-separated string Selection list

Default
0.0 P2

Link Codes

Top, Datum

Omit Link

Include link, start point and end point

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Offset and tie the end-of-link to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Elevation and tie the end-of-link to a profile

Status
Optional

Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

168 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given offset and elevation.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays a horizontal link using the given Offset input parameters as the width.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LinkOffsetAndSlope
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from the attachment point to a specified offset at a given slope. An alignment can be substituted for the offset, and a profile for the slope.

LinkOffsetAndSlope | 169

Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The direction of the link is determined by the location of the given offset and elevation relative to the attachment point.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Offset from Baseline

Description
+/- offset of the end of the link

Type
Numeric

Default
10.0 m 33.0 ft % slope

Slope Type %

True if the slope value is a % slope. False if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1) slope. % slope of the link. Negative slopes go downward in the direction inserted A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of codes to be assigned to the link Add the link, the start point, and the end point, or omit the link and add the end point only.

Selection list: % slope X:1 slope Numeric

Slope

2 (%), (or 2:1) P2

Point Codes

Comma-separated string Comma-separated string Selection list

Link Codes

Top, Datum

Omit Link

Include link, start point and end point

170 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Offset and tie the end-of-link to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Slope and tie the end-of-link to a profile

Status
Optional

Slope

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given offset at the given slope.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link calculated from the given offset and slope parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

LinkOffsetAndSlope | 171

Coding Diagram

LinkOffsetOnSurface
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link from the attachment point to a given offset on a target surface. An alignment can be used when building a corridor model to calculate the offset.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Offset from Baseline

Description
+/- offset to tie the link into the target surface

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

172 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Point Codes

Description
A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of codes to be assigned to the link

Type
Comma-separated string Comma-separated string Selection list

Default
P2

Link Codes

Top, Datum

Omit Link

Add the link, the start point, and the end point, or omit the link and add the end point only.

Include link, start point and end point

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Offset and tie the end-of-link to an offset alignment Name of the surface the link is tying to

Status
Optional

Target Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
A link is extended to the point on the target surface at the given offset.

LinkOffsetOnSurface | 173

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link drawn to the given offset at a -4 : 1 slope. The link terminates with an arrowhead pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link at a slope for a vertical deflection distance. A profile can be given for the vertical deflection when building a corridor model.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly can be inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

174 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side Slope Type %

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly True if the slope value is a % slope. False if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1) slope.

Type
Left/Right Selection list: % slope X:1 slope Numeric , positive, nonzero Numeric. non-zero Comma-separated string Comma-separated string True / False

Default
Right % Slope

Slope

% or ratio slope of the link.

2 (%), (or 2:1)

Vertical Deflection Point Codes

+/- Vertical deflection between the beginning and end of the link A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of codes to be assigned to the link

3.0 m 10.0 ft P2

Link Codes

Top, Datum False

Omit Link

False to add the link, the start point, and the end point.True to add the end point only.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Vertical Deflection

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed Vertical Deflection and tie the end-of-link to a profile Optional

LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection | 175

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point in the direction of insertion for the given slope until it reaches the given elevation. If a profile name is specified at runtime, the vertical deflection is adjusted to match the profile elevation.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given slope and vertical deflection.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopesBetweenPoints
This subassembly is used to insert intersecting links between two points.

176 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

It is typically used to place intersecting slopes to a V-ditch between the edges of two adjacent or merging roadways. A flat-bottomed ditch can also be specified.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the outside edge of either the left or right intersecting slope, and the previously defined marked point must be on the opposite outside edge. It does not matter which point is left or right of the other. When prompted for marker point, choose attachment point. Be sure to name the marked point and set the marked point name in this subassembly.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Marked Point Name Slope 1

Description
Name of the previously defined marked point Slope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from the attachment point. Negative slope values are downward. Slope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from the marked point Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero for a V-ditch)

Type
String Numeric

Default
None -4 ( : 1)

Slope 2

Numeric

-4 ( : 1)

Ditch Width

Numeric, positive

0.6 m 2 ft

LinkSlopesBetweenPoints | 177

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The locations of the attachment point and marked point are determined. The marked point may be either to the right or left of the attachment point. Links are extended inward at Slope 1 from the attachment point, and Slope 2 from the marked point, until they intersect. If a non-zero ditch width is given, a horizontal bottom-of-ditch link is fit into the intersecting side slopes.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the intersecting links and optional ditch bottom based on the input parameters given and the relative locations of the attachment and marked points.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P2

Code

Description

Ditch_In Ditch

For non-zero ditch width, the edge of ditch closest to the attachment point. If the ditch width is zero, use Ditch. For non-zeroditch width, the edge of ditch closest to the marked point Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median links

P3

RMedDitch

L1 L3

Top Datum

178 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopeToElevation
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link at a given slope until it reaches a defined elevation or profile.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly can be inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly % slope if the slope value is a % slope. X : 1 if the slope value is a ratio (X : 1) slope.

Type
Left/Right

Default
Right

Slope Type % ?

Selection list: % slope X:1 slope

% slope

LinkSlopeToElevation | 179

Parameter
Slope

Description
% or ratio slope of the link. Negative slopes go downward in the direction inserted. Elevation value to extend the link to at the given slope A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of codes to be assigned to the link

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
2 (%), (or 2:1)

Target Elevation

Numeric

0.0

Point Codes

Comma-separated string Comma-separated string Selection list

P2

Link Codes

Top, Datum

Omit Link

Adds the link, the start point, and the end point, or omits the link and adds the end point only.

Include link, start point and end point

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Target Elevation

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed Target Elevation and tie the end-of-link to a profile

Status
Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

180 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point in the direction of insertion for the given slope until it reaches the target elevation or profile. The slope value is applied upward if the target elevation is above the attachment point, otherwise a negative slope is used.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given slope for a horizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopeToSurface
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link from the attachment point at a given slope to the closest intersection with a target surface.

LinkSlopeToSurface | 181

Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side Slope Type %

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly True if the slope value is a % slope. False if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1) slope.

Type
Left/Right Selection list: % slope X:1 slope Numeric

Default
Right % Slope

Slope

% slope of the link. Negative slopes go downward in the direction inserted. A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of codes to be assigned to the link

2 (%), (or 2:1)

Point Codes

Comma-separated string Comma-separated string Selection list

P2

Link Codes

Top, Datum

Omit Link

Adds the link, the start point, and the end point, or omits the link and adds the end point only.

Include link, start point and end point

182 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Target Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the surface the link is tying to

Status
Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
A link is extended to the left or right from the attachment point at the given slope until it intersects the target surface.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly attempts to find the intersection of the link, if the target surface was inserted by a previous subassembly. If an intersection is found, the link is displayed at the given slope to the surface. If not, the link is displayed at the given slope outward for a horizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet, terminating in an arrowhead pointing outward.

LinkSlopeToSurface | 183

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LinkToMarkedPoint
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from the attachment point to a previously named marked point. It can be used in a variety of situations, including connecting between adjacent roadways where the relative offsets and elevations vary, or across a gore area between converging roadways. Use the MarkPoint subassembly if the connecting point has not already been named.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The link may go in any direction. The direction is determined by the location of the marked point relative to the attachment point. Be sure to name the marked point and set the marked point name in this subassembly.

184 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Marked Point Name Link Codes

Description
Name of the marked point to connect to

Type
String

Default
None

A list of codes to be assigned to the link

Comma-separated string Selection list

Top, Datum

Omit Link

Adds the link, the start point, and the end point, or omits the link and adds the end point only.

Include link, start point and end point

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given marked point.

LinkToMarkedPoint | 185

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link between the attachment point and the marked point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LinkVertical
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to add a vertical surface link by vertical deflection. A profile can be used when building a corridor model to allow variable vertical deflection.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly can be inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

186 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Vertical Deflection

Description
+/- vertical deflection from the attachment point. Negative deflections are downward. A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of codes to be assigned to the link

Type
Numeric

Default
3.0 m 10.0 ft P2

Point Codes

Comma-separated string Comma-separated string Selection list

Link Codes

Top, Datum

Omit Link

Adds the link, the start point, and the end point, or omits the link and adds the end point only.

Include link, start point and end point

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Vertical Deflection

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed Vertical Deflection and tie the end-of-link to a profile

Status
Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric

LinkVertical | 187

Behavior
A vertical link is added from the attachment point for the given vertical deflection. If a profile name is given for the Vertical Deflection, the end of the link will match the profile elevation.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link for the given +/- vertical deflection.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

LinkWidthAndSlope
This subassembly is a general purpose utility to add a surface link by specifying its width and slope. Either a % slope or ratio slope value may be given. An alignment or profile can be used when building a corridor model to allow variable width and slope.

188 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly can be inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side Width

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of the lane from the offset of the inside edge to the offset of the outside edge Specifies whether the slope value represents a % slope or an x : 1 slope.

Type
Left/Right Numeric, positive Selection list: % slope x : 1 slope Numeric

Default
Left 3.0 10.0 ft % slope

Slope Type

Slope

% slope of the link. Negative slopes go downward in the direction inserted. A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outside edge of the link A list of surface codes to be assigned to the link

2 (%), (or 2:1) P2

Point Codes

Comma-separated string Comma-separated string Selection list

Link Codes

Top, Datum Include link, start point and end point

Omit Link

Adds the link, the start point, and the end point, or omits the link and adds the end point only.

LinkWidthAndSlope | 189

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed link Width and tie the end-of-link to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed % Slope and tie the endof-link to a profile

Status
Optional

%Slope

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
The link is added in the direction of insertion starting at the attachment point and going the given width and slope. If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment. If a profile name is assigned to the Slope, the slope is adjusted to match the profile elevation at the end of the link.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given width and slope.

190 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

Coding Diagram

MarkPoint
This subassembly is used to mark an existing point on the assembly with a name. This is usually done so that other subassemblies can later insert links that attach back to this point (for example, LinkToMarkedPoint). The attachment point is the point that is marked. You can add user-defined point coodes to this marked point. In the example below, there are two roadways with independent profiles. Once the links for the first roadway are created, the point at the left outside edge is being marked. Later, after the links for the second roadway are created, a link can be inserted from its right outside edge back to the marked point.

Attachment
The marked point name is placed at the attachment point.

MarkPoint | 191

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Point Name Point Codes

Description
Name to mark the attachment point with Specify point codes at this location as needed, comma-separated, if multiple

Type
String String

Default
None MarkedPoint

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
A name is assigned to the selected attachment point. This point can be referenced by name in subassemblies added later to the assembly.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws a triangle symbol at the location of the marked point, and labels the marked point name above the point.

192 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link
P1

Code
MarkedPoint

Description
Marked point code

Coding Diagram
None.

MedianDepressed
This subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed median between the attachment point and a previously named marked point. Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not already been marked.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the outside edge of either the left or right median ditch slope, and the previously defined marked point must be on the opposite outside edge. It does not matter which point is left or right of the other.

MedianDepressed | 193

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Marked Point Name Slope 1

Description
Name of the previously defined marked point

Type
String

Default
None

Slope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from the attachment point Slope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from the marked point For the cases where the top-of-ditch-slope points are at unequal elevations, selects whether to hold the ditch sideslopes and let the position of the ditch shift, or to hold the ditch at the center and adjust the sideslope on the high side. Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero for a V-ditch)

Numeric

-4 ( : 1)

Slope 2

Numeric

-4 ( : 1)

Hold Ditch Slopes

Selection list

Hold ditch sideslopes, shift ditch from center

Ditch Width

Numeric, positive

0.6 m 2 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The locations of the attachment point and marked point are determined. The marked point may be either to the right or left of the attachment point. Links are extended inward at Slope 1 from the attachment point, and at Slope 2

194 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

from the marked point, until they intersect. If a ditch width is given, a horizontal bottom-of-ditch link is fit into the intersecting side slopes. Ditch Slopes The top of the ditch slopes may be at different elevations on the left and right sides, resulting in an asymmetrical ditch. There are two options for handling this situation. If Hold Ditch Slopes is set to True, then the Slope 1 and Slope 2 values are held on both sides, shifting the bottom of ditch away from the centerline towards the lower side. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centered about the midpoint offset between the tops-of-slopes, the given slope is held on the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to match on the higher side.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P2

Code

Description

LMedDitch

Left edge of median ditch

MedianDepressed | 195

Point, Link, or Shape


P3 L1 L3

Code

Description

RMedDitch Top Datum

Right edge of median ditch Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median links

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median links based on the input parameters given and the relative locations of the attachment point and marked point.

Coding Diagram

MedianDepressedShoulderExt
This subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed median with inside shoulders, using extended termination of shoulder subbase. It supports superelevation pivoting about the attachment point at the centerline, or about the attachment point elevation at the inside edges-of-traveled-way. The pavement structure on the paved portions of the shoulder follows the standards described in "Pavement Structure of Paved Sections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

196 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is above the centerline of the ditch. The location of the median links relative to the attachment point varies depending on the pivot method, and in some cases, the median widths and lane slopes. The attachment point is typically placed on the baseline alignment at the design profile elevation.

MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 197

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Ditch Width

Description
Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero for a V-ditch) Inward slope from the shoulders toward the bottom of ditch (x : 1) For the cases where the top-of-ditch-slope points are at unequal elevations, selects whether to hold the ditch sideslopes and let the position of the ditch shift, or to hold the ditch at the center and adjust the sideslope on the high side Select whether the profile grade and pivot point is at the centerline above the median ditch, or if it is held at the inside edges-of-traveled-ways Width from the median centerline to the left inside edge-of-traveled-way Width from the median centerline to the right inside edge-of-traveled-way Width of the paved inside shoulder

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Selection list

Default
0.6 m 2 ft 25%

Ditch Slope

Hold Ditch Slopes

Hold ditch sideslopes, shift ditch from center Pivot about centerline 6.6 m 22 ft 6.6 m 22 ft 0.6 m 2.0 ft 0.0

Centerline Pivot?

Selection list

Left Median Width

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Right Median Width

Paved Shoulder Width Pave1 Extension

Width that the Pave1 layer extends beyond the edge-of-shoulder. The bottom of the Pave1 layer may not extend beyond the ditch sideslope. Width that the Pave2 layer extends beyond the edge-of-shoulder. This should be equal to or greater

Pave2 Extension

Numeric, positive

0.0

198 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter

Description
than the Pave1 extension. The bottom of the Pave2 layer may not extend beyond the ditch sideslope.

Type

Default

Base Extension

Width that the Base layer extends beyond the edgeof-shoulder. This should be equal to or greater than the Pave2 extension. If a large value is used, the Base layer is terminated at the intersection with the ditch slope.The Base layer should not extend beyond the ditch sideslope. Depth between the paved shoulders finish grade and Pave1 surfaces Depth between the paved shoulders Pave1 and Pave2 surfaces Depth between the paved shoulders Pave2 and Base surfaces Depth between the paved shoulders Base and Subbase surfaces Width of the optional turning lane on the left side

Numeric, positive

0.0

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.025 m, 0.083 ft 0.025 m, 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.3 m 1 ft 0

Pave2 Depth

Base Depth

Subbase Depth

Left Turn Lane Width

Right Turn Lane Width

Width of the optional turning lane on the right side

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Ditch Slope

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the Ditch Slope and tie the median bottom-of-ditch to a profile

Status
Optional

MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 199

Parameter
Left Median Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Left Median Width and tie the left inside edge-oftraveled-way to an offset alignment. May be used to ovrride the fixed Right Median Width and tie the right inside edgeof-traveled-way to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Right Median Width

Alignment

Optional

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly cannot be inserted separately for the left and right sides. It builds the median to both sides of the attachment point. Superelevation Pivot Point The median can be configured to have the pivot point at the centerline, or at the inside edges of traveled ways. If Centerline Pivot is used, the left and right outside lane superelevation slopes are obtained from the baselines superelevation specifications, and the elevations of the inside edges-of-traveled-ways are calculated by applying these slopes to the left and right median widths from the attachment point. If Centerline Pivot is not used, the edges-of-traveled-ways are held to the elevation of the attachment point. Ditch Elevations and Slopes Superelevation or turning lanes may cause the top of the ditch slopes to be at different elevations on the left and right sides, resulting in an asymmetrical ditch. There are two options for handling this situation. If Hold Ditch Slopes is set to True, then the given ditch slopes are held constant on both sides, which shifts the bottom of ditch away from the centerline towards the lower side. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centered about the median centerline, the given slope is held on the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to match on the higher side.

200 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Shoulder Treatment The paved shoulders follow the slopes defined for the left and right inside shoulder slopes for the baseline alignments superelevation specifications. These slopes are applied inward from the inside edges of traveled ways. The subbase surfaces follows the same slope as the finished grade, and is extended inwards to the intersections with the ditch slopes.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median and shoulders based on the input parameters given, with lane slopes of -2%, paved shoulder slopes of -5%, and turning lane widths of zero.

MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 201

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
Points Links S1 S2 S3 S4

Code

Description

As shown below As shown below Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Coding Diagram

202 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

MedianDepressedShoulderVert
This subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed median with inside shoulders, using vertical termination of shoulder subbase. It supports superelevation pivoting about the attachment point at the centerline, or about the attachment point elevation at the inside edges-of-traveled-way. The pavement structure on the paved portions of the shoulder follows the standards described in "Pavement Structure of Paved Sections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 203

Table of Widths
W1 W2 W3 Ditch Left Median Right Median

Table of Slopes
S1 S2 S3 Ditch of Foreslope Unpaved Shoulder Slope Left Inside Superelevation

204 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Table of Widths
W4 Paved Shoulder

Table of Slopes
S4 Right Inside Superelevation Shoulder Slope Left Outside Lane Slope Right Outside Lane Slope

W5 W6 W7

Unpaved Shoulder Left Turn Lane Right Turn Lane

S5 S6

Attachment
The attachment point is above the centerline of the ditch. The location of the median links relative to the attachment point varies depending on the pivot method, and in some cases, the median widths and lane slopes. The attachment point is typically placed on the baseline alignment at the design profile elevation.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Ditch Width

Description
Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero for a V-ditch Inward slope from the shoulders toward the bottom of ditch (x : 1) For the cases where the top-of-ditch-slope points are at unequal elevations, selects whether to hold the ditch sideslopes and let the position of the ditch shift, or to hold the ditch at the center and adjust the sideslope on the high side.

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Selection list

Default
0.6 m 2 ft 25%

Ditch Slope

Hold Ditch Slopes

Hold ditch sideslopes, shift ditch from center

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 205

Parameter
Centerline Pivot?

Description
Select whether the profile grade and pivot point is at the centerline above the median ditch, or if it is held at the inside edges-of-traveled-ways Width from the median centerline to the left inside edge-of-traveled-way Width from the median centerline to the right inside edge-of-traveled-way Width of the paved portion of the inside shoulder

Type
Selection list

Default
Pivot about centerline 6.6 m 22 ft 6.6 m 22 ft 0.6 m 2.0 ft 1.2 m 4.0 ft -6 (%)

Left Median Width

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric

Right Median Width

Paved Shoulder Width Unpaved Shoulder Width Unpaved Shoulder %Slope Pave1 Depth

Width of the unpaved portion of the inside shoulder

% slope of the unpaved portion of the inside shoulder Depth between the finish grade and Pave1 surface

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.3 m 1 ft 0

Pave2 Depth

Depth between the Pave1 and Pave2 surfaces

Base Depth

Depth between the Pave2 and Base surfaces

Subbase Depth

Depth between the paved shoulders finish grade and subbase surfaces Width of the optional turning lane on the left side

Left Turn Lane Width

Right Turn Lane Width

Width of the optional turning lane on the right side

206 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Ditch Slope

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the Ditch Slope and tie the median bottom-of-ditch to a profile May be used to override the fixed Left Median Width and tie the left inside edge-oftraveled-way to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Right Median Width and tie the right inside edgeof-traveled-way to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Left Median Width

Alignment

Optional

Right Median Width

Alignment

Optional

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly cannot be inserted separately for the left and right sides. It builds the median to both sides of the attachment point. Superelevation Pivot Point The median can be configured to have the superelevation pivot point at the centerline, or at the inside edges of traveled ways. If Centerline Pivot is used, the left and right outside lane superelevation slopes are obtained from the baselines superelevation specifications, and the elevations of the inside edges-of-traveled-ways are calculated by applying these slopes to the left and right median widths from the attachment point. If Centerline Pivot is not used, the edges-of-traveled-ways are held to the elevation of the attachment point. Ditch Elevations and Slopes Superelevation or turning lanes may cause the top of the ditch slopes to be at different elevations on the left and right sides, resulting in an asymetrical ditch. There are two options for handling this situation. If Hold Ditch Slopes is set to True, then the given ditch slopes are held constant on both sides, which shifts the bottom of ditch away from the centerline towards the lower side. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centered about the median centerline,

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 207

the given slope is held on the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to match on the higher side.

Shoulder Treatment The paved portions of the shoulders follow the slopes defined for the left and right inside shoulder slopes for the baseline alignments superelevation specifications. These slopes are applied inward from the inside edges of traveled ways. The unpaved portions of the shoulders are fixed at the given Unpaved Shoulder %Slope value.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median and shoulders based on the input parameters given, and assuming that the lane slopes are -2% and the paved shoulder slopes are -5%.

208 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P2, P7 P10, P17 P12, P19 P14, P21 P16, P23 P3, P6 P4 P5 L1, L7

Code

Description

EPS EPS_Pave1 EPS_Pave2 EPS_Base EPS_Sub ES_Unpaved LMedDitch RMedDitch Top Pave Top Datum Pave1 Pave2 Base SubBase Datum

Edges of paved shoulder on finish grade Edges of paved shoulder on Pave1 Edges of paved shoulder on Pave2 Edges of paved shoulder on Base Edges of paved shoulder on Subbase Edges of gravel shoulder Left edge of median ditch Right edge of median ditch Finish grade on paved shoulders

L2 L6

Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median links

L8, L12 L9, L13 L10, L14 L11, L15 L11, L15, L16, L17

Subbase and vertical links on paved shoulders

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 209

Point, Link, or Shape


S1, S5 S2, S6 S3, S7 S4, S8

Code

Description

Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Coding Diagram

MedianFlushWithBarrier
This subassembly inserts surfaces to define a flush median with an optional New Jersey Barrier. The pavement structure follows the standards described in Pavement Structure of Paved Sections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

210 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is at the center of median on the finish grade surface. This component inserts to the left and right side simultaneously.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Include Barrier

Description
True shows the New Jersey barrier. False omits the barrier. Width from the median centerline to the left edge of median Width from the median centerline to the right edge of median % slope of the left median surface. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes

Type
Selection list

Default
Include Barrier 1.2 m 4.0 ft 1.2 m 4.0 ft LI

Left Width

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric or string

Right Width

Left %Slope

MedianFlushWithBarrier | 211

Parameter

Description
to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope (left) LO: outside lane slope (left)

Type

Default

Right %Slope

% slope of the right median surface. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope (right) LO: outside lane slope (right) Thickness of the Pave1 layer; zero to omit

Numeric or string

LI

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.025m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft 810 mm 32 in 232 9 in 59 mm 2 in 125 mm 5 in

Pave2 Depth

Thickness of the Pave2 layer; zero to omit.

Base Depth

Thickness of the base layer

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the subbase layer

Dimension A (mm or inches) Dimension B (mm or inches) Dimension C (mm or inches) Dimension D (mm or inches)

Height of the barrier at the center of median

As shown in diagram

As shown in diagram

As shown in diagram

212 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Dimension E (mm or inches) Dimension F (mm or inches)

Description
As shown in diagram

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
557 mm 22 in 178 mm 7 in

As shown in diagram

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Left Width and tie the left edge-of-median to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Right Width and tie the right edge-of-median to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Right Width

Alignment

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Left %Slope Right %Slope

Description
% slope of the left side of the median % slope of the right side of the median

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
The pavement structure links are inserted outward left and right of the attachment point for the given widths and slopes. If the Include Barrier value is True, a New Jersey barrier is inserted symmetrically about the median centerline. If alignments are given as runtime logical assignments for the Left and Right Widths, the widths are adjusted to tie to the alignment offsets at each station along the corridor.

MedianFlushWithBarrier | 213

If the median is in superelevation with a single constant slope across the entire median, the top of the barrier is slanted to match the median slope. Otherwise the top of the barrier remains horizontal. In all cases, the barrier height (Dimension A) is held constant at the centerline of the barrier.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all pavement links using the width and depth input parameters at a -2% slope. If Include Barrier is True, the barrier is displayed with the given dimensions.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
All barrier points P1, P3 P2 P4, P6 P5 P7, P9 P8 P10, P12 P11

Code
Barrier ETW Crown ETW_Pave1 Crown_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 Crown_Pave2 ETW_Base Crown_Base

Description
All points on the concrete barrier Inside edge of lane on finish grade Crown of median on finish grade Edge-of-traveled-way on Pave1 Crown on Pave1 Edge-of-traveled-way on Pave2 Crown on Pave2 Edge-of-traveled-way on Base Crown on Base

214 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
P13, P15 P14 L1, L2 L3, L4 L5, L6 L7, L8 L9, L10

Code
ETW_Sub Crown_Sub Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase Datum Barrier Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase Barrier

Description
Edge-of-traveled-way on Subbase Crown on Subbase

All barrier links S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

Area between finish grade and Pave1 Area between Pave1 and Pave2 Area between Pave2 and Base Area between Base and Subbase Shape inclosed by the barrier.

MedianFlushWithBarrier | 215

Coding Diagram

MedianRaisedConstantSlope
This subassembly inserts links for a constant-slope raised median between two points.

Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not already been marked.

Attachment
The attachment point may be at either edge of the median finished grade. The marked point must be at the opposite edge.

216 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensions must be given in millimeters or inches. Parameter
Marked Point

Description
Name of the marked point on the median edge opposite the attachment point Depth of the median cap. May be zero for an unpaved median

Type
String

Default
None

Depth

Numeric, positive

0.100 m 0.333 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The top of median link is inserted between the attachment point and marked point. If a non-zero Depth is given, the bottom of median link is inserted parallel to the top, and vertical links are added to close the shape.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1, P2 P3, P4 L1 L2 L3, L4 Top Datum None Top of median Bottom of median

Code

Description

None

Edges of median on finish grade

MedianRaisedConstantSlope | 217

Point, Link, or Shape


S1

Code

Description

Median

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly shows the generic layout mode display.

Coding Diagram

MedianRaisedWithCrown
This subassembly inserts links for a constant-slope raised median between two points.

Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not already been marked.

Attachment
The attachment point may be at either edge of the median finished grade. The marked point must be at the opposite edge.

218 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensions must be given in millimeters or inches. Parameter
Marked Point

Description
Name of the marked point on the median edge opposite the attachment point Depth of the median cap. May be zero for an unpaved median. % slope from the median crown toward the attachment point. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope LO: outside lane slope SI: inside shoulder slope Slope from the median crown toward the marked point. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type LI: inside lane slope LO: outside lane slope SI: inside shoulder slope

Type
String

Default
None

Depth

Numeric, positive Numeric or string

0.100 m 0.333 ft - 2%

Slope 1

Slope 2

Numeric or string

- 2%

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

MedianRaisedWithCrown | 219

Behavior
The median crown point is calculated by intersecting lines extended between the attachment point and the marked point at the given slopes. If no intersection is found, the median is not inserted. If a non-zero Depth is given, the bottom of the median links are inserted parallel to the top, and vertical links are added to close the shape.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P1, P3 P2 P4 - P6 L1, L2 L3, L4 S1

Code

Description

None Median None Top Datum Median Top of median Bottom of median (if given) Crown of median on finish grade

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly shows the generic layout mode display.

Coding Diagram

220 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges
This subassembly is used to overlay a four-lane crowned corridor between gutter flange points on each side, holding to required slope and breakover ranges. This subassembly differs from OverlayBrokenBackOverGutter because it overlays between known flange points, rather than overlaying existing gutter to a known profile on the face of curb. To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining the left and right edges. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces or profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as marked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. This is typically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode, this point coincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finshed grade profile point (or baseline marker point) may not be same as crown point, since its offset and elevation are computed by edge of pavement data.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Left Flange Offset

Description
Distance between default attachment point to left edge of pavement. This value is used only if no alignment or marked point is associated to left edge.

Type
Numeric

Default
- 18ft

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 221

Parameter
Right Flange Offset

Description
Distance between default attachment point to right edge of pavement. This value is used only if no alignment or marked point is associated to right edge. Provides existing left edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL) Provides existing right edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL) Minimum depth of overlay at the quarter points and crown. Minimum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Minimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum breakover, in % slope, at the centerline. Minimum crown deflection at the quarter points.

Type
Numeric

Default
6m and 18ft

Left Flange Marked Point Right Flange Marked Point

String

None

String

None

Minimum Overlay

Numeric

0.1m and 0.33ft -1%

Inside Min %Slope

Numeric

Inside Max %Slope

Numeric

-4%

Outside Min %Slope

Numeric

-2%

Outside Max %Slope

Numeric

-6%

Max Breakover Min Crown Deflections

Numeric Numeric

4% 0.05m and 0.16ft

222 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Note that if runtime logical assignments are provided, the preceding parameters (namely default offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Flange Point

Type
Alignment

Description
Provides left edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point. Provides right edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point. Provides left edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point. Provides right edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point. If profiles are not supplied for left/right edge of pavement elevations, then this surface elevation at that offset will be picked up as elevation value (for left/right) respectively.

Status
Optional

Right Flange Point

Alignment

Optional

Left Flange Profile

Profile

Optional

Right Flange Profile

Profile

Optional

EGTopSurf

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Left Outside Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the left outside lane

Type
Numeric

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 223

Parameter
Left Inside Lane %Slope Right Outside Lane %Slope Right Inside Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the left inside lane % slope of the right outside lane

Type
Numeric Numeric

% slope of the right inside lane

Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly uses an iterative process to develop acceptable slopes of the inside and outside links. The initial slopes are set as described below. Each time the slope of one link is adjusted, resulting changes in the adjacent links may put them out of design tolerances. If a solution is not obtained within 10 iterations, a message is displayed and the process is aborted. Left Edge of Pavement From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is located based on: (a) the location of the alignment through the "Left Flange Point" logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned marked point (to Left Flange Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it is based on the default (Left Flange Offset) offset value. Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) the Left Flange profile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then the surface elevation is determined from the "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment , or (c) if both of these are not provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation. An error message results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor fails to build. Right Edge of Pavement From the attachment point, the right edge of pavement point is located based on: (a) location of alignment through "Right Flange Point" logical assignment, (b) if previous is not provided, based on the assigned marked point (to Right Flange Point), or (c) if both are not provided based on the default (Right Flange Offset) offset value. Similarly, elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Flange profile logical assignment, or (b) if previous is not provided then finding out the surface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if the

224 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

previous two are not provided, the assigned marked point determines the elevation. An error message results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor fails to build. Crown Point The Crown Point (offset) is located at halfway between the left edge and right edge of pavements. Elevation of the crown point is the sum of "average elevation of left and right edges" and the "crown height" parameter value. Bottom of Overlay Bottom of overlay surface is computed by offsetting the proposed finish grade (Left Edge point to New Crown Point to Right Edge Point) by Overlay depth value. Quarter Points and Crown Point Offsets The distance between left and right flange points is divided by four to get the two quarter points and the crown point. These points elevations are computed by adding the minimum overlay depth to the existing ground at these offsets. Inside and Outside Pavement Slopes The resulting overlay links from the previous steps are checked for being within the slope tolerances for the outside and inside lanes. If the slopes are within the tolerence, then the case is a simple overlay as shown in the following diagram.

If overlay links are too steep, or if the Maximum Breakover is exceeded at the centerline, or the Min Crown Deflection is not obtained, some or all links are flattened to their maximum slopes. Milling surfaces are inserted to hold the minimum overlay depths at the quarter points and centerline. If overlay links are too shallow, the depth of overlay is increased to achieve the minimum slopes. If this results in too much breakover, further adjustments and milling may occur. The following diagram explains overlay with milling case:

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 225

Special Cases A positive slope may be allowed on one inside link if the other inside link has a negative slope, as shown below.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly inserts two lanes at either side of the attachment point. First two edge points will be located based on left/right offsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated (in layout mode) by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the "Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, since the programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default the crown point matches with attachment point. Lane slopes in layout mode are equal to the "Min % Outside/Inside Slope" value. Thickness of pavement is equal to Minimum Overlay depth.

226 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P5 P6, P10 P3 P8 P2. P4 P7, P9

Code
ETW ETW_Overlay Crown Crown_Overlay LaneBreak LaneBreak_Overlay

Description
Edges of lane on finish grade Edges of lane on Overlay Crown (grade break) on finish grade Crown (grade break) on Overlay Grade break point at quarter points Grade break point at quarter points on overlay surface Finish grade surface Overlay surface Overlay area

L1, L2, L3, L4 L5, L6, L7, L8 S1

Top, Pave Overlay Overlay

Coding Diagram

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters
This subassembly is used to overlay a four-lane crowned corridor over gutters (between flow lines) on each side, holding to required slope and breakover ranges. This subassembly differs from OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges because

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 227

it overlays existing gutters to a known profile on the curb face, rather than overlaying between known flange points. To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining the left and right curb face points. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces or profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as marked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. Since the subassembly places lanes on either side of the crown, this attachment point is typically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode this point coincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finished grade profile point (or baseline marker point) may not be same as crown point, since crown point offset and elevation are computed by input data such as left and right (Curb face) offset values.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Left Gutter Offset

Description
Distance between attachment point and the left gutters curb face. This value is used only if no alignment or marked point is associated to left edge. Distance between attachment point and the right gutters curb face. This value is used only if no alignment or marked point is associated to right edge.

Type
Numeric

Default
6m and 18ft

Right Gutter Offset

Numeric

6m and 18ft

228 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Left Gutter Marked Point Right Gutter Marked Point

Description
Provides existing left edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL) Provides existing right edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL) Minimum depth of overlay at the quarter points and crown. Minimum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Minimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum breakover, in % slope, at the centerline. Minimum crown deflection at the quarter points.

Type
String

Default
None

String

None

Minimum Overlay

Numeric

0.1m and 0.33ft -1%

Inside Min %Slope

Numeric

Inside Max %Slope

Numeric

-4%

Outside Min %Slope

Numeric

-2%

Outside Max %Slope

Numeric

-6%

Max Breakover Min Crown Deflections

Numeric Numeric

4% 0.05m and 0.16ft

If runtime logical assignments are provided, the parameters above (namely default offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 229

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Gutter Point

Type
Alignment

Description
Provides left edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point. Provides right edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point. Provides left edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point. Provides right edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point. If profiles are not supplied for left/right edge of pavement elevations, then this surface elevation at that offset will be picked up as elevation value (for left/right) respectively.

Status
Optional

Right Gutter Point

Alignment

Optional

Left Gutter Profile

Profile

Optional

Right Gutter Profile

Profile

Optional

EGTopSurf

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Left Outside Lane %Slope Left Inside Lane %Slope Right Outside Lane %Slope Right Inside Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the left outside lane

Type
Numeric

% slope of the left inside lane % slope of the right outside lane

Numeric Numeric

% slope of the right inside lane

Numeric

230 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Behavior
This subassembly uses an iterative pocess to develop acceptable slopes of the inside and outside links. The initial slopes are set as described below. Each time the slope of one link is adjusted, resulting changes in the adjacent links may put them out of design tolerances. If a solution is not obtained within 10 iterations, a message is displayed and the process is aborted. Left Edge of Pavement From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is located based on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Left Gutter Point" logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it is based on the assigned marked point (to Left Gutter Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, it is based on the default (Left Gutter Offset) offset value. Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Left Gutter profile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines the surface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two are not provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation. An error messageresults if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor fails to build. Right Edge of Pavement From the attachment point, the right edge of the pavement point is located based on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Right Gutter Point" logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned marked point (to Right Gutter Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it is based on the default (Right Gutter Offset) offset value. Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Gutter profile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines the surface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two are not provided, then the marked point determines the elevation. An error message results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor fails to build. Quarter Points and Crown Point Offsets The distance between left and right flange points is divided by four to get the two quarter points and the crown point. These points elevations are computed by adding the minimum overlay depth to the existing ground at these offsets. Inside and Outside Pavement Slopes The resulting overlay links from the previous steps are checked for being within the slope tolerances for the outside and inside lanes. If the slopes are within

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 231

the tolerance, then the case is a simple overlay as show in the following diagram.

If the overlay links are too steep, or if the Maximum Breakover is exceeded at the centerline, or the Min Crown Deflection is not obtained, some or all links are flattened to their maximum slopes. Milling surfaces are inserted to hold the minimum overlay depths at the quarter points and centerline. If overlay links are too shallow, the depth of overlay is increased to achieve the minimum slopes. If this results in too much breakover, further adjustments and milling may occur. The following diagram illustrates the overlay with milling case.

Special Cases A positive slope may be allowed on one inside link if the other inside link has a negative slope, as shown below.

232 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly inserts two lanes at either side of the attachment point. The firts two edge points will be located based on left/right offsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated, in layout mode, by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the "Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, since the programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default, the crown point matches the attachment point. Lane slopes in layout mode are equal to the "Min % Outside/Inside Slope" value. Thickness of pavement is equal to Minimum Overlay depth.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P5 P6, P10 P3 P8 P2. P4 P7, P9

Code
ETW ETW_Overlay Crown Crown_Overlay LaneBreak LaneBreak_Overlay

Description
Edges of lane on finish grade Edges of lane on Overlay Crown (grade break) on finish grade Crown (grade break) on Overlay Grade break point at quarter points Grade break point at quarter points on overlay surface

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 233

Point / Link
L1, L2, L3, L4 L5, L6, L7, L8 S1

Code
Top, Pave Overlay Overlay

Description
Finish grade surface Overlay surface Overlay area

Coding Diagram

OverlayCrownBetweenEdges
Creates a simple crowned roadway between two edge-of-pavement points. To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining the left and right edges. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces or profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as marked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

234 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. This is typically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode, this point coincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finshed grade profile point (or baseline marker point) may not be the same as crown point since its offset and elevation are computed by edge of pavement data.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Left Edge Offset

Description
Distance between default attachment point to left edge of pavement. This value is used only if no alignment or marked point is associated to left edge. Distance between default attachment point to right edge of pavement. This value is used only if no

Type
Numeric

Default
3.6m and 12ft

Right Edge Offset

Numeric

3.6m and 12ft

OverlayCrownBetweenEdges | 235

Parameter

Description
alignment or marked point is associated to right edge.

Type

Default

Left Edge Marked Point Right Edge Marked Point

Provides existing left edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL) Provides existing right edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL) Height from the center point of the string line to the crown point. Minimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Depth of overlay above existing finish grades.

String

None

String

None

Crown Height

Numeric

0.1m and 0.33ft -1%

Min %Slope

Numeric

Max %Slope

Numeric

-3%

Overlay Depth

Numeric

0.1m and 0.30ft

If runtime logical assignments are provided, the preceding parameters (namely default offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Edge

Type
Alignment

Description
Provides left edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point. Provides right edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point.

Status
Optional

Right Edge

Alignment

Optional

236 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Left Edge

Type
Profile

Description
Provides left edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point. Provides right edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point. If profiles are not supplied for left/right edge of pavement elevations, then this surface elevation at that offset will be picked up as elevation value (for left/right) respectively.

Status
Optional

Right Edge

Profile

Optional

EGTopSurf

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
Left Lane %Slope Right Lane %Slope

Description
% slope of the left lane % slope of the right lane

Type
Numeric Numeric

Behavior
Left Edge of Pavement From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is located based on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Left Edge" logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned marked point (to Left Edge), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it is based on the default (Left Edge) offset value. Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Left Edge profile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines the surface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two are not provided, the assigned marked pointdetermines the elevation. An error message results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor fails to build. Right Edge of Pavement From the attachment point, the right edge of the pavement point is located based on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Right Edge" logical

OverlayCrownBetweenEdges | 237

assignment, (b) if previous is not provided, based on the assigned marked point (to Right Edge), or (c) if both are not provided based on the default (Right Edge) offset value. Similarly , the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Edge profile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines the surface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two are not provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation. An error message results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor fails to build. Crown Point Crown Point (offset) is located at halfway between the left edge and right edge of pavements. Elevation of the crown point is the sum of "average elevation of left and right edges" and the "crown height" parameter value. Bottom of Overlay Bottom of overlay surface is computed by offsetting the proposed finish grade (Left Edge point to New Crown Point to Right Edge Point) by Overlay depth value.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly inserts one lane each on either side of the attachment point. First two edge points will be located based on left/right offsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated (in layout mode) by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the "Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, since the programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default the crown point matches with baseline marker point. Lane slopes in layout mode are equal to the "Min % Slope" value. Thickness of pavement is equal to Overlay depth.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P3 P4, P6

Code
ETW ETW_Overlay

Description
Edges of lane on finish grade Edges of lane on Overlay

238 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
P2 P5 L1, L2 L3, L4 S1, S2

Code
Crown Crown_Overlay Top, Pave Overlay Overlay

Description
Crown (grade break) on finish grade Crown (grade break) on Overlay Finish grade surface Overlay surface Overlay area

Coding Diagram

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical
Widens an existing divided highway by extending from the travel lane edges inward over a depressed median, with an asymmetrical barrier at the centerline to resolve elevation differences. It includes an option to tie the top-of-barrier elevation to a predefined profile.

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 239

Attachment
The attachment point is the center of the base of the barrier.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Overlay Depth

Description
Thickness of the median overlay layers.

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
0.100 m 0.3 ft

240 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Left Insert Offset Left Inside Sample Offset

Description
Offset where the median extension layer begins on the left side. Offset of the inside sample point on the left side. The slope of the left side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Offset of the outside sample point on the left side. The slope of the left side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Offset where the median extension layer begins on the right side. Offset of the inside sample point on the right side. The slope of the right side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Offset of the outside sample point on the right side. The slope of the right side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Height of the barrier from the base on the high side of the median to the top of the barrier. As shown in diagram.

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Numeric

0.0

Left Outside Sample Offset

Numeric

0.0

Right Insert Offset Right Inside Sample Offset

Numeric

0.0

Numeric

0.0

Right Outside Sample Offset

Numeric

0.0

Dimension A (mm or inches) Dimension B (mm or inches) Dimension C (mm or inches) Dimension D (mm or inches) Dimension E (mm or inches)

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

810 mm 32 in 232 9 in 59 mm 2 in 125 mm 5 in 557 mm 22 in

As shown in diagram.

As shown in diagram.

As shown in diagram.

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 241

Parameter
Dimension F (mm or inches)

Description
As shown in diagram.

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
178 mm 7 in

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the Surface defining the existing roadway. May be used to tie the top of barrier to the elevation of a profile. Dimension E may vary to achieve the calculated barrier height. May be used to calculate the offset of the left insert point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the left inside sample point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the left outside sample point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the right insert point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the right inside sample point from an alignment.

Status
Required

Top of Barrier

Profile

Optional

Left Insert Offset

Alignment

Optional

Left Inside Sample Offset

Alignment

Optional

Left Outside Sample Offset

Alignment

Optional

Right Insert Offset

Alignment

Optional

Right Inside Sample Offset

Alignment

Optional

242 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Right Outside Sample Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to calculate the offset of the right outside sample point from an alignment.

Status
Optional

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The left and right slopes are calculated between the sample points on each side. Lines from the cutout points are extended inward at these slopes to the centerline. The side with the highest elevation at the centerline determines the controlling side for the minimum height of the barrier. The offset of the barrier base on the high side is calculated from the given dimensions. The overlay layer on the high side is extended from the cutout point to this offset. The overlay layer on the low side is extended from the cutout point to the offset of the barrier base on the high side. The barrier is constructed from the base point on the high side, closing to the top of the overlay layer on the low side, as shown in the diagram. If a top-of-barrier profile is given as a runtime logical assignment, the height of the barrier is controlled by the profile. Dimension E may vary to achieve this height.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, a symmetrical median and barrier are drawn with the fixed dimensions shown below. This is the same figure that is drawn in layout mode for the OverlayMedianSymmetrical subassembly.

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 243

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P5 P3, P7

Code
ETW ETW_Overlay

Description
Beginning of median extension at top of overlay Beginning of median extension at bottom of overlay

All barrier points L1, L5 L2 - L4 L7 - L9 All barrier links S1, S2 S3

Barrier Top Overlay Overlay Barrier Overlay Barrier Exposed top of overlay layers

244 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram
NOTE The mirror image will apply when the high side of the median is on the right instead of the left.

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 245

OverlayMedianSymmetrical
Widens an existing divided highway by extending from the travel lane edges inward over a depressed median, with a symmetrical barrier at the centerline. The median slopes may vary somewhat from the existing slopes to make both sides meet at the centerline, or to hold the top of the barrier to a profile.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the midpoint of the base of the barrier.

246 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Overlay Depth

Description
Thickness of the median overlay layers.

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
0.100 m 0.3 ft 5%

Slope Tolerance

Amount that the median % slopes are allowed to vary from the calculated existing Left and Right slopes. Offset where the median extension layer begins on the left side. Offset of the inside sample point on the left side. The slope of the left side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Offset of the outside sample point on the left side. The slope of the left side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Offset where the median extension layer begins on the right side. Offset of the inside sample point on the right side. The slope of the right side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Offset of the outside sample point on the right side. The slope of the right side is calculated on the existing surface between the sample points. Height of the barrier from the base on the high side of the median to the top of the barrier.

Left Insert Offset Left Inside Sample Offset

Numeric

0.0

Numeric

0.0

Left Outside Sample Offset

Numeric

0.0

Right Insert Offset Right Inside Sample Offset

Numeric

0.0

Numeric

0.0

Right Outside Sample Offset

Numeric

0.0

Dimension A (mm or inches)

Numeric, positive

810 mm 32 in

OverlayMedianSymmetrical | 247

Parameter
Dimension B (mm or inches) Dimension C (mm or inches) Dimension D (mm or inches) Dimension E (mm or inches) Dimension F (mm or inches)

Description
As shown in diagram.

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
232 9 in 59 mm 2 in 125 mm 5 in 557 mm 22 in 178 mm 7 in

As shown in diagram.

As shown in diagram.

As shown in diagram.

As shown in diagram.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the Surface defining the existing roadway. May be used to tie the top of barrier to the elevation of a profile. Dimension E may vary to achieve the calculated barrier height. May be used to calculate the offset of the left insert point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the left inside sample point from an alignment.

Status
Required

Top of Barrier

Profile

Optional

Left Insert Offset

Alignment

Optional

Left Inside Sample Offset

Alignment

Optional

248 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Left Outside Sample Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to calculate the offset of the left outside sample point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the right insert point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the right inside sample point from an alignment. May be used to calculate the offset of the right outside sample point from an alignment.

Status
Optional

Right Insert Offset

Alignment

Optional

Right Inside Sample Offset

Alignment

Optional

Right Outside Sample Offset

Alignment

Optional

Behavior
The left and right slopes are calculated between the sample points on each side. If the Top of Barrier Profile is not given:

On each side, a line is calculated that extends from the cutout points to the centerline using the slopes calculated from the sample points. If the two lines do not meet at equal elevations, the median slope on the higher side is adjusted down to meet the lower side. The adjustment may not exceed the Slope Tolerance. If the high side was adjusted by the slope tolerance and the two sides still do not meet, the low side is adjusted upward. If the adjustment required is greater than the Slope Tolerance, the subassembly exits without storing any points, links, or shapes.

If a Top of Barrier Profile is given as a runtime logical assignment:

The left and right barrier base points are calculated from the profile elevation using the given barrier dimensions.

OverlayMedianSymmetrical | 249

The slopes between the barrier base points and the insert points are calculated. If the difference between the median slope and the existing slope is greater than the slope tolerance on either side, the subassembly exits without storing any points, links, or shapes. Otherwise, the median and barrier geometry is added, based on the calculated barrier base point positions, with the median slopes adjusted to tie to the barrier base points.

Output Parameters
None.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, a median and barrier are drawn with the fixed dimensions as shown in the following diagram. This is the same figure that is drawn in layout mode for the OverlayMedianAsymmetrical subassembly.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P5

Code
ETW

Description
Beginning of median extension at top of overlay

250 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
P3, P7 All barrier points L1 - L3 L4 - L8 All barrier links S1 S2

Code
ETW_Overlay Barrier Top Overlay Barrier Overlay Barrier

Description
Beginning of median extension at bottom of overlay

Exposed top of overlay layers

Coding Diagram

OverlayMillAndLevel1
This subassembly adds an overlay layer on an existing uncrowned roadway or ramp, with either a leveling and milling layer added as required.

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 251

Attachment
The attachment point is the edge of overlay on finish grade at the inside trim point.

252 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Inside Sample Point Offset

Description
Offset of the inside sample point. The sample points are used to calculate the slope of the existing roadway. Offset of the outside sample point.

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Outside Sample Point Offset Inside Trim Point

Numeric

0.0

Offset of the inside trim point, which defines the inside edge of the overlay layer Offset of the outside trim point, which defines the outside edge of the overlay layer %Slope of the overlay layer. This can be specified with the following options: Code: Superelevation Type Value: A numeric % slope value from the inside to outside edge. M: Match the slope from the Inside Sample Point to the Outside Sample Point. S: Use the outside lane superelevation slope of the corridor alignment. If the Inside Points are left of the Outside Points, the left side superelevation is used. Otherwise the right side isused. The value that the Overlay Slope is allowed vary from its design value. The slope tolerance is not used if the Overlay Slope is given as M (see Behavior below for details).

Numeric

0.0

Outside Trim Point

Numeric

0.0

Overlay %Slope (val / M / S)

Numeric or String

%Slope Tolerance

Numeric, positive

0.5%

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 253

Parameter
Use Profile

Description
Selects whether to hold the top of overlay at the inside trim point to the corridor profile elevation, or to set the vertical placement of the overlay layer based on the Minimum Clearance value The minimum vertical clearance between the existing surface and the bottom of the overlay layer. A positive value places the bottom-of-overlay link above the existing surface, creating a Leveling layer beneath the overlay. A negative value places the bottom-of-overlay link below the existing surface, creating a Milling layer that coincides with a portion of the Overlay layer. The thickness of the overlay layer

Type
Selection List

Default
Use minimum clearance

Minimum Clearance (+/-)

Numeric

0.100 m 0.30 ft

Overlay Depth

Numeric, positive

0.100 m 0.30 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the Surface defining the existing roadway May be used to override the fixed Inside Sample Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Outside Sample Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Inside Trim Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment

Status
Required

Inside Sample Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Outside Sample Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Inside Trim Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

254 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Outside Trim Point Offset

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Outside Trim Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
%Slope

Description
The slope used for applying the overlay layer

Type
Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the top and bottom of an overlay layer. The links are inserted from the Inside Trim Offset to the Outside Trim Offset. Overlay Slopes The slope of the Existing Surface is determined between the inside and outside sample points. The slope of the overlay layer is determined by the following steps: 1 If the Overlay %Slope input is given as M, then the overlay slope matches the slope from the Inside Sample Point to the Outside Sample point. 2 If the Overlay %Slope is given as S, then the overlay uses the outside lane superelevation slope defined for the corridor alignment. The left side slope is used if the Outside Sample Point is to the left of the Inside Sample Point, otherwise the right side superelevation slope is used. 3 If a numeric value is given for the Overlay %Slope, the given value is used. 4 If a numeric value or the superelevation slope is used, the overlay slope is compared to the existing slope between the sample points. If the difference exceeds the Slope Tolerance value, the design slope is adjusted up or down by the Tolerance value to make it more closely match the existing slope and minimize the amount of leveling or milling. Slope adjustment does not occur if the Slope Tolerance is zero.

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 255

256 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Overlay Elevations The elevations of the overlay points are determined as follows: 1 If the Use Profile value is True, the elevation of the corridor profile is held at the Inside Trim offset on the top of overlay. The overlay is extended at the overlay slope to the Outside Trim offset, and a parallel link is inserted for the bottom-of-overlay. Any areas above the existing surface and below the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code Level. Areas below the existing surface and above the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code Mill. 2 If the Use Profile value is False, the bottom-of-overlay link is shifted vertically to hold to the Minimum Clearance above or below the existing surface. A positive Minimum Clearance creates a leveling area above the existing surface and below the bottom-of-overlay. A negative clearance creates a milling area below the existing surface and above the bottom-of-overlay. Minimum Clearance Point The method of determining the point where the Minimum Clearanceapplies is shown in the diagram below. 1 A vertical projection line is established at any arbitrary offset.

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 257

2 Each point on the Existing Surface between the two trim points is projected back to the projection line at the Overlay Slope. 3 The point with the highest elevation on the projection line is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value greater than zero. The one with the lowest is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value less than zero.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the overlay layer positioned from any convenient point of attachment at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P2 P3, P4 L1 L2, L3, L4

Code
EOV EOV_Overlay Top, Pave Overlay

Description
Overlay edges on finish grade Edges of bottom-of-overlay Top of overlay Overlay links. Note that L3, L4 go from the bottomof-overlay to top-of-overlay in both the Leveling and Milling cases For the Leveling case For the Milling case

L5, L6

Level Mill

258 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
S1

Code
Overlay

Description
Area between the top and bottom of overlay. This overlaps the milling area (S3) for the Milling case as shown in the Coding Diagram below. Area above existing surface and below the bottom of overlay (Leveling case) Area below the existing surface and above the bottom of overlay (Milling case). This area overlaps the Overlay area as shown in the Coding Diagram below.

S2

Level

S3

Mill

Coding Diagram

OverlayMillAndLevel2
This subassembly adds an overlay layer on an existing crowned roadway, with either a leveling and milling layer added as required.

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 259

Attachment
The attachment point is the crown point on the overlay finish grade.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Crown Point Offset

Description
Offset of the crown point. The crown and sample points are used to calculate the left and right slopes of the existing roadway. Offset of the left sample point

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Left Sample Point Offset Right Sample Point Offset

Numeric

0.0

Offset of the right sample point

Numeric

0.0

260 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Left Trim Point

Description
Offset of the left trim point, which defines the outside edge of the overlay layer on the left side Offset of the right trim point, which defines the outside edge of the overlay layer on the right side %Slope of the overlay layer from the crown point to the left trim point. This can be specified with the following options: Code: Superelevation Type Value: A numeric % slope value from the inside to outside edge. M: Match the slope from the Inside Sample Point to the Outside Sample Point. S: Use the outside lane superelevation slope of the corridor alignment. %Slope of the overlay layer from the crown point to the right trim point. This can be specified with the same options used for the left side. The value that the Overlay Slopes are allowed vary from their design values. The slope tolerance is not used if the Overlay Slope is given as M (see Behavior below for details). Selects whether to hold the top of overlay at the inside trim point to the corridor profile elevation, or to set the vertical placement of the overlay layer based on the Minimum Clearance value The minimum vertical clearance between the existing surface and the bottom of the overlay layer. A positive value places the bottom-of-overlay link above the existing surface, creating a Leveling layer beneath the overlay. A negative value places the bottom-of-overlay link below the existing sur-

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Right Trim Point

Numeric

0.0

Left Overlay %Slope (val / M / S)

Numeric or String

Right Overlay %Slope (val / M / S) %Slope Tolerance

Numeric or String

Numeric, positive

0.5%

Use Profile

Selection List

Use minimum clearance

Minimum Clearance (+/-)

Numeric

0.100 m 0.30 ft

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 261

Parameter

Description
face, creating a Milling layer that coincides with a portion of the Overlay layer.

Type

Default

Overlay Depth

The thickness of the overlay layer

Numeric, positive

0.100 m 0.30 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the Surface defining the existing roadway May be used to override the fixed Crown Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Left Sample Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Right Sample Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Left Trim Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Right Trim Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment

Status
Required

Crown Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Left Sample Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Right Sample Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Left Trim Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Right Trim Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

262 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Output Parameters
Parameter
Left Overlay %Slope

Description
The slope used for applying the overlay layer on the left side The slope used for applying the overlay layer on the right side

Type
Numeric

Right Overlay %Slope

Numeric

Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the top and bottom of an overlay layer on each side that join at the crown point. The links are inserted from the Crown Point Offset to the Left and Right Trim Offsets. Overlay Slopes The slope of the Existing Surface on each side is determined betweenthe crown and sample points. The slopes of the overlay layers aredetermined by the following steps: 1 If the Overlay %Slope input is given as M, then the overlay slope matches the slope from the Crown Point to the Sample point. 2 If the Overlay %Slope is given as S, then the overlay uses the outside lane superelevation slope defined for the corridor alignment. 3 If a numeric value is given for the Overlay %Slope, the given value is used. 4 If a numeric value or the superelevation slope is used, the overlay slope is compared to the existing slope between the sample points. If the difference exceeds the Slope Tolerance value, the design slope is adjusted up or down by the Tolerance value to make it more closely match the existing slope and minimize the amount of leveling or milling. Slope adjustment does not occur if the Slope Tolerance is zero.

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 263

264 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 265

Overlay Elevations The elevations of the overlay points are determined as follows: 1 If the Use Profile value is True, the elevation of the corridor profile is held at the Crown Point offset on the top of overlay. The overlay is extended to each side at the overlay slopes to the Left and Right Trim offsets, and parallel links are inserted for the bottom-of-overlay. Any areas above the existing surface and below the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code Level. Areas below the existing surface and above the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code Mill. 2 If the Use Profile value is False, the bottom-of-overlay link on each side is shifted vertically to hold to the Minimum Clearance above or below the existing surface. A positive Minimum Clearance creates a leveling area above the existing surface and below the bottom-of-overlay. A negative clearance creates a milling area below the existing surface and above the bottom-of-overlay. The overlay links on one side are shifted vertically so that the links meet at the crown point. Minimum Clearance Point

266 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

The method of determining the point where the Minimum Clearance applies is shown in the diagram below. 1 A vertical projection line is established at any arbitrary offset. 2 Each point on the Existing Surface between the two trim points is projected back to the projection line at the Overlay Slope. 3 The point with the highest elevation on the projection line is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value greater than zero. The one with the lowest is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value less than zero.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the overlay layer positioned from any convenient point of attachment at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2, P3 P4 P5, P6

Code
Crown EOV Crown_Overlay EOV_Overlay

Description
Crown on finish grade Overlay edges on finish grade Crown on bottom-of-overlay Edges of bottom-of-overlay

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 267

Point / Link
L1, L2 L3 L6

Code
Top, Pave Overlay

Description
Top of overlay Overlay links. Note that L5, L6 go from the bottom-of-overlay to top-of-overlay in both the Leveling and Milling cases. Verticals from existing surface to bottom-of-overlay: Level - For the Leveling case. Mill - For the Milling case. Area between the top and bottom of overlay. This overlaps the milling area (S3) for the Milling case as shown below. Area above existing surface and below the bottom of overlay (Leveling case) Area below the existing surface and above the bottom of overlay (Milling case). This area overlaps the Overlay area as shown below.

L7, L8

Level Mill

S1

Overlay

S2

Level

S3

Mill

268 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

OverlayParabolic
This subassembly inserts parabolic travel lanes, to represent finish grade, pavement, and subbase for urban, parabolic lanes between known flange points. The parabolic shape is simulated by a series of short, straight-line links. To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining the left and right flange points. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces or profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as marked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

OverlayParabolic | 269

Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. Since the subassembly places lanes on either side of the crown, this attachment point is typically at the assembly baseline point. While in the layout mode this point coincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finished grade profile point (or baseline marker point) may not be the same as crown point, as crown point offset and elevation are computed by input data such as left and right (flange point) offset values.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Left Flange Offset

Description
Distance between attachment point to left edge of pavement. This value is used only if no alignment or marked point is associated to left edge. Distance between attachment point to right edge of pavement. This value is used only if no alignment or marked point is associated to right edge. To provide existing left edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly (OPTIONAL) To provide existing right edge of pavement offset and elevation to start the subassembly (OPTIONAL)

Type
Numeric

Default
7.2m 24.0ft

Right Flange Offset

Numeric

7.2m 24.0ft

Left Flange Marked Point Right Flange Marked Point

String

None

String

None

270 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Crown Height

Description
Height from the center point of the string line to the crown of road. Minimum % cross slope allowed for the lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Maximum % cross slope allowed for the lanes, in the outward direction from the attachment point. Depth of overlay below the finish grade.

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric

Default
0.10m 0.3333ft -1%

Min %Slope

Max %Slope

Numeric

-4%

Overlay Depth

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive, even

0.025m 0.083ft 8

No. Increments

Number of straight line increments simulating the parabolic shape

If runtime logical assignments are provided, the parameters above (namely default offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Left Gutter Point

Type
Alignment

Description
This will provide left edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point This will provide right edge of pavement offset value with respect to the attachment point This will provide left edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point This will provide right edge of pavement elevation value with respect to the attachment point

Status
Optional

Right Gutter Point

Alignment

Optional

Left Gutter Profile

Profile

Optional

Right Gutter Profile

Profile

Optional

OverlayParabolic | 271

Parameter
EGTopSurf

Type
Surface

Description
If profiles are not supplied for left/right edge of pavement elevations, then this surface elevation at that offset will be picked up as elevation value (for left/right) respectively

Status
Required

Output Parameters
None

Behavior
Initial attachment point is just a place holder (and more applicable in layout mode). First two points to establish are left and right edges, whose offsets and elevations are determined based on input parameters. Then a string line is defined by joining the left and right flange points (which are newly established edges of travelways). This string line is divided by "number of increments" parameter and middle one is taken as "crown point" offset. Crown point elevation is established by adding the 'crown height" parameter to the elevation of midpoint on the string line. The ordinates of the parabolic curve at other tesselated points are calculated using standard vertical curve equations, based on the assumption that the string line is horizontal. Straight line links are added to connect the ordinate points in a series (from left edge to crown point to right edge) to define the finish grade. A parallel surface is inserted at the overlay depth below this finish grade.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly inserts equal number (based on input parameter) lanes on either side of the attachment point. First two edge points will be located based on left/right offsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated (in layout mode) by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the "Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, since the programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default the crown point matches with attachment point. Lane slopes are accepted as they come in. Thickness of pavement is equal to overlay depth.

272 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P3 P4, P6 P2 P5 L1 to Ln L(n+1) to L(2n)

Code
ETW ETW_Overlay Crown Crown_Overlay Top, Pave Overlay

Description
Outside edges of lane on finish grade Outside edges of lane on the Base surface Crown point on finish grade Crown point on Pave1 Links connecting all points on finish grade Links connecting all points on bottom of overlay surface Area between finish grade and Pave1

S1

Overlay

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1
This subassembly overlays one side of an existing road, and adds one or more travel lanes to the edge while matching the existing lane slopes.

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 273

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the top of the overlay layer.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Sample Point Offset

Description
Offset of the sample point, which may be anywhere between the insertion point and the next slope break on the existing road surface. Typical Sample point locations are the crown of road, or the opposite edge-of-traveled-way if the road is not crowned. Offset of the insertion point, which is typically at the edge-of-traveled-way where the widening is to occur

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Insert Point Offset

Numeric

0.0

274 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Overlay Depth

Description
Depth of the overlay above the existing finish grade

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
0.100 m 0.30 ft 3.6 m 12.0 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Width

Width of the widening lane

Pave1 Depth

Thickness of the Pave1 layer for the lane widening; zero to omit Thickness of the Pave2 layer for the lane widening; zero to omit Thickness of the base layer for the lane widening

Pave2 Depth

Base Depth

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the subbase layer for the lane widening

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the Surface defining the existing roadway May be used to override the fixed Sample Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Insert Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed widening lane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment

Status
Required

Sample Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Insert Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Width

Alignment

Optional

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 275

Output Parameters
Parameter
%Slope

Description
The calculated slope on the existing surface from the Sample Point to the Insert Point

Type
Numeric

Behavior
The elevations of the Sample Point and Insert Point on the Existing Surface are determined, and the slope is calculated from the sample point to the insert point. An overlay layer is added above the existing lane at the same slope for the given Overlay Depth. A closed overlay shape is created by superimposing one or more links over the existing grade.The widening lane is attached outward from the overlay at the Insert Offset using the calculated slope. The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single verttical link is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly is attached to any convenient point. The overlay layer is shown at a uniform depth for a width of 3.6 meters or 12 ft at a slope of -2%. The widening lane extends from the edge-of-overlay for the given width and depths at a -2% slope. In modeling mode the shapes adjust to the actual conditions determined by the Sample Point, Insert Point, and Existing Surface.

276 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P5 P7 P9 P11 P13 L1, L5 L2

Code
ETW ETW_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 ETW_Base ETW_Sub Top, Pave Overlay

Description
Outside edge of widening lane on finish grade Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1 Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2 Outside edge of widening lane on Base Outside edge of widening lane on Subbase Finish grade surface Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface. Note that there may be more than a single link between points P3 and P4.

L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 S1 S2 S3 S4

Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase, Datum Datum Overlay Pave1 Pave2 Base Area between the overlay and existing lane

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 277

Point / Link
S5

Code
Subbase

Description

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2
This subassembly overlays an existing uncrowned road, and adds one or more travel lanes to the left and right edges while matching the existing lane slope.

278 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edges of the finish grade on the widening lanes.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Left Insert Point Offset

Description
Offset of the Left Insert Point. This is the point where the widening lane on the left begins, and is typically at the existing left edge-of-traveled-way. Offset of the Right Insert Point, typically at the existing right edge-of-traveled way

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Right Insert Point Offset

Numeric

0.0

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 279

Parameter
Overlay Depth

Description
Depth of the overlay above the existing finish grade

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
0.100 m 0.30 ft 3.6 m 12.0 ft 3.6 m 12.0 ft 0.025m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Left Width

Width of the left widening lane

Right Width

Width of the right widening lane

Pave1 Depth

Depth between finish grade and Pave1

Pave2 Depth

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2

Base Depth

Depth between Pave2 and Base

Subbase Depth

Depth between the subbase and the top of the base layer

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the Surface defining the existing roadway May be used to override the fixed Left Insert Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Right Insert Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment

Status
Required

Left Insert Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Right Insert Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

280 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Left Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Left Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Right Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Right Width

Alignment

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
%Slope

Description
The calculated slope on the existing surface from the Sample Point to the Insert Point

Type
Numeric

Behavior
The elevations of the Left and Right Insert Points on the Existing Surface are determined, and the slope is calculated between the two points. If a non-zero Overlay Depth is given, an overlay layer is added above the existing lane at the calculated slope. A closed overlay shape is created by superimposing one or more links over the existing grade. The widening lanes are inserted outward from the overlay edges for the given widths at calculated slope. If the Overlay Depth is given as zero, the widening lanes are inserted outward from the insert offsets at the existing grade. The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single verttical link is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly is attached to any convenient point. The overlay layer is shown at a uniform depth for a width of 4.2 meters or 14 feet at a slope of -2%. The widening lanes extend from the edges-of-overlay at the given widths and depths at the -2% slope.

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 281

In modeling mode the subassembly adjusts to the positions and slopes determined by the Insert Points and the Existing Surface.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P5 P7 P9 P11 P13 L1, L5 L2

Code
ETW ETW_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 ETW_Base ETW_Sub Top, Pave Overlay

Description
Outside edge of widening lane on finish grade Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1 Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2 Outside edge of widening lane on Base Outside edge of widening lane on Subbase Finish grade surface Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface. Note that there may be more than a single link between points P3 and P4.

282 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

Code
Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase, Datum Datum Overlay Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Description

Area between the overlay and existing lane

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 283

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenWithSuper1
This subassembly overlays one side of an existing road, and adds one or more travel lanes to the edge using the superelevation slope defined for the outside travel lane.

284 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the top of the overlay layer if the Overlay Depth is non-zero, or at the inside edge on finish grade of the widening lane if the Overlay Depth is zero.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Control Point Offset

Description
Offset of the control point, which defines the beginning of the pavement overlay layer Offset of the insertion point of the widening lane, which is typically at the existing edge-of-traveledway Depth of the overlay above the existing finish grade at the control point.

Type
Numeric

Default
0.0

Insert Point Offset

Numeric

0.0

Overlay Depth

Numeric, positive

0.100 m 0.30 ft

OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 285

Parameter
Width

Description
Width of the widening lane

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
3.6 m 12.0 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave1 Depth

Thickness of the Pave1 layer for the lane widening; zero to omit Thickness of the Pave2 layer for the lane widening; zero to omit Thickness of the base layer for the lane widening

Pave2 Depth

Base Depth

Subbase Depth

Thickness of the subbase layer for the lane widening

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the Surface defining the existing roadway May be used to override the fixed Control Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Insert Point Offset and tie the point to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed widening lane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment

Status
Required

Control Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Insert Point Offset

Alignment

Optional

Width

Alignment

Optional

286 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Output Parameters
Parameter
%Slope

Description
The calculated slope on the existing surface from the Sample Point to the Insert Point

Type
Numeric

Behavior
The outside lane superelevation is obtained from the alignment properties of the current control alignment, and the elevation on the Existing Surface at the Control Point Offset is determined. If a non-zero Overlay Depth is given, the overlay depth is applied at the control point. The top of the overlay layer extends to the Insert Point Offset at the superelevation slope, and the overlay shape is closed by superimposing links over the Existing Surface between the control and insert points and adding vertical links at each end. The widening lane is extended outward at the superelevation slope for the given Width from the edge of the overlay surface. If the Overlay Depth is zero, the widening lane extends outward from the Insert Point Offset on the Existing Surface at the superelevation slope for the given Width. The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single verttical link is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly may be attached to any convenient point. The overlay layer is shown at a uniform depth, with a width of 3.6 meters or 12 feet and extended at a slope of -2%. If the Overlay Depth is zero, the overlay is shown as a single link. The widening lane extends from the edge-of-overlay at a slope of -2%. When used in corridor modeling mode, the shapes adjust to the selected control point, insert point, superelevation slope, and existing surface.

OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 287

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P5 P7 P9 P11 P13 L1, L5 L2

Code
ETW ETW_Pave1 ETW_Pave2 ETW_Base ETW_Sub Top, Pave Overlay

Description
Outside edge of widening lane on finish grade Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1 Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2 Outside edge of widening lane on Base Outside edge of widening lane on Subbase Finish grade surface Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface. Note that there may be more than a single link between points P3 and P4.

L6

Pave1

288 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
L7 L8 L9 L10 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

Code
Pave2 Base Subbase, Datum Datum Overlay Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Description

Area between the overlay and existing lane.

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 289

Subassembly Reference (continued)

3
In this chapter

RailSingle RetainWallTapered RetainWallTaperedWide RetainWallTieToDitch RetainWallToLowSide RetainWallVertical ShapeTrapezoidal ShoulderExtendAll ShoulderExtendSubbase ShoulderVerticalSubbase SideDitch SideDitchUShape SideDitchWithLid SnapToMarkedPoint StrippingPavement StrippingTopSoil TrenchWithPipe TrenchPipe1 UrbanCurbGutterGeneral

291

UrbanCurbGutterValley1 UrbanCurbGutterValley2 UrbanCurbGutterValley3 UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 UrbanReplaceSidewalk UrbanSidewalk

292 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

RailSingle
This subassembly inserts the rails, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast for a single-track railroad. It should be followed with a Daylight subassembly on the left and right sides to close to existing ground in cut and fill situations.

NOTE This subassembly is designed for visualization and to demonstrate the use of corridor modeling for rail applications. It is not intended for actual engineering production work.

Attachment
The attachment point is at a distance equal to the rail height above the centerline of the sleeper.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Rail % Slope Gauge Width

Description
% slope of the roadbed Width of the rail gauge from inside-to-inside rail. The rails are placed symetrically about the centerline alignment.

Type
Numeric Numeric, positive

Default
0 (%) 1.435 m 4.7083 ft (4 81/2)

RailSingle | 293

Parameter
Sleeper Width

Description
Width of the sleeper, placed symetrically about the centerline Height of the sleeper

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
2.4 m 8.0 ft 0.200 m 0.67 ft 3.6 m 12.0 ft 0.3 1.0 ft 2 (: 1)

Sleeper Height

Ballast Width

Width of the top of the ballast layer, placed symetrically about the centerline Thickness of the ballast layer from finish grade Side slope (x : 1) of the ballast layer

Ballast Depth

Ballast Side Slope

Sub-ballast Width

Width of the top of the sub-ballast layer, placed symetrically about the centerline Thickness of the sub-ballast layer

6.6 m 22.0 ft 0.3 1.0 ft 2 (: 1)

Sub-ballast Depth

Sub-ballast Side Slope

Side slope of the sub-ballast layer

Runtime Logical Assignments (optional)


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The links for the rails, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast are calculated and placed based on the input parameter values provided. If the Rail %Slope is non-zero, the corridor profile elevation is held at the center of the rail on the low side.

294 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

The finish grade, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast links are maintained at the Rail %Slope.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the finish grade, ballast, sub-ballast, and side slopes.

Constants
Point, Link, or Constant Shape
P1, P4 P2, P3 P8,P9 P7, P10 EBS ESL Daylight_Ballast ESBS

Description

Edge of ballast shoulder Edge of sleeper Daylight point for the ballast layer Edge of subballast shoulder

RailSingle | 295

Point, Link, or Constant Shape


P11, P12 All rail points Daylight_Subballast R1, R2, ..

Description

Daylight point for the sub-ballast layer Numbered sequentially for longitudinal connection (not shown in diagram) Finish grade on ballast layer Finish grade on top-of-sleeper Sides of sleeper Sideslopes on ballast layer (side slopes) Bottom of ballast Finish grade on subballast layer

L1, L3 L2 L4, L6 L7, L8 L10 L9, L11, L12, L14 L13 S1 S2 S3 Rail shapes

Top, Ballast Top, Sleeper Sleeper Top, Ballast Ballast Top, Subballast

Subballast Sleeper Ballast Subballast Rail

Bottom of subballast

Not shown in diagram

296 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

RetainWallTapered
This subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one tapered side and an optional key at the bottom.

RetainWallTapered | 297

298 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is in cut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near the top of the retaining wall. If it is inserted in cut condition, the attachment point is near the footing.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Specifies the width of the wall at the top The distance between the top-of-the wall and the hook in fill or the new hook in cut. The depth of cover from the top-of-footing to the finish grade line on the back side of the wall in fill or to the hook when in cut. Species to add an optional key below the footing

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Wall Top Width

Numeric

0.958 ft 0.292 m

Top Height

Footing Cover

Key

Boolean

Yes

Wall height is determined from the top of the footing to the insertion point of the ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall battered slope, width of the footing, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions, and the location of the key center, are all functions of the wall height.

RetainWallTapered | 299

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Wall Height

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed wall height and tie to a profile. Existing ground surface name to determine retaining wall in cut or fill.

Status
Optional

Target Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. The attachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of the wall, at a distance of Top Height below the top of the wall. In cut, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face, at a distance of Footing Cover above the top-of-footing. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height or Profile input. In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In cut, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional Key are inserted.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P2

Codes
RW_Front RW_Top

Description

300 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point/Link
P3 P14 P12

Codes
RW_Back RW_Hinge RW_Inside

Description

Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface

P5

RW_Outside

L1, L2, L3 L4,L5,L6 S1

Top, Wall Datum RWall L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;

Coding Diagram
Fill Condition

Cut Condition

RetainWallTapered | 301

RetainWallTaperedWide
This subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one side tapered, and is typically used if walls are 5.5 meters or higher.

302 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

This subassembly also adds an optional key at the bottom.

Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is in a cut or fill condition. If it is in a fill condition, the attachment point is near the top of the retaining wall. In a cut condition, the attachment point is near the footing.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Specifies the width of the wall at the top

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Wall Top Width

Numeric

1.476 ft 0.450 m

RetainWallTaperedWide | 303

Parameter
Top Height

Description
the distance between the top-of-the wall and the hook in fill or the new hook in cut. The depth of cover from the top-of-footing to the finish grade line on the back side of the wall in fill or to the hook when in cut. Species to add an optional key below the footing

Type

Default

Footing Cover

Key

Boolean

Yes

Wall height is determined from the top of the footing to the attachment point of ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Width and depth of the footing are measured as a function of the wall height. Wall vertical face is located at of the footing width, and the bottom of battered slope is at 300 mm from the other edge. Optional key is locate right at the center of the footing at 300mm deep and 600mm wide.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Wall Height

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed wall height and tie to a profile. Assigned profile corresponds to Existing ground surface name to determine retaining wall in cut or fill.

Status
Optional

Target Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. The attachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of the wall, at a distance below the top of the wall equal to the Top Height parameter.

304 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

In a cut condition, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face, above the top-of-footing at a distance equal to the Footing Cover parameter. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height or Profile input. In a fill condition, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In a cut condition, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway, toward the earth being retained. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are created.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P2 P3 P14 P12

Codes
RW_Front RW_Top RW_Back RW_Hinge RW_Inside

Description

Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3 to P14; L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;

P5

RW_Outside

L1, L2, L3

Top, Wall

L4,L5,L6

Datum

RetainWallTaperedWide | 305

Point/Link
S1

Codes
RWall

Description

Coding Diagram
Fill Condition

Cut Condition

306 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

RetainWallTieToDitch
This subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with a paved shoulder and with special tie slopes to tie to an existing ditch.

This subassembly can place an optional barrier on the top of the wall and an optional key below the footing.

Attachment
The attachment point is on the inside of the shoulder.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

RetainWallTieToDitch | 307

Parameter
Shoulder Width

Description
Width of the shoulder from the attachment point Depth of Pave 1, Enter ZERO if no Pave 1 Depth of Pave 2, Enter ZERO if no Pave 2 Depth of base layer Depth of the subgrade layer Specifies the width of the wall.

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default

Pave 1 Depth

Numeric, Positive

Pave 2 Depth

Numeric, Positive

Base Depth Subgrade Depth Wall Width

Numeric

0.958 ft 0.292 m

Footing Cover

The depth of cover from the topof-footing to the finish grade line on the back side of the wall in fill or to the hook when in cut. Species to add an optional key below the footing Specifies to use a barrier on the top of the wall Width of the walkway link on the tie slope Slope of the walkway link (grade/slope type) Slope of the fill link from the walkway to the tie point (Slope type) Boolean Yes

Key

Use Barrier

String, (a) Yes, (b) No

Yes

Walk Width

Numeric, Positive

Walk Slope

Numeric

Fill Slope

Numeric

308 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Toe Width

Description
Width from ditch point to the tie point (to existing inside edge of the ditch)

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default

Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point of ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall battered slope, width of the footing, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions, and the location of the key center are all functions of the wall height.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Edge of Shoulder

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the shoulder slope by tieing to a profile. Inside edge of ditch profile used to locate Tie Point Existing ground surface to tie in with respect to specified ditch and toe width

Status
Optional

Ditch Offset

Alignment

Required

Tie-in Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted either on the left or the right sides. The attachment point is assumed to be at the design edge-of-travel-way, from where the paved shoulders will be drawn as specified by this subassembly. The top-of-footing elevation is determined by working inwards from the Tie Point to the inside edge of walkway, then subtracting the Footing Cover from the tie link at the offset of the outside footing corner. The height of wall (H) is calculated between the Outside Edge of the Shoulder and the top of footing. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are inserted.

RetainWallTieToDitch | 309

Note: A very small gap (0.001 for m) is left between the pavement layers and the inside face of wall. This is to facilitate material analysis using the quantity takeoff feature, as shown in the detail below.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P2 P3 P14 P12

Codes
Daylight Walk_Edge RW_Hinge RW_Inside

Description

Edge of the walk width

Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface

P5

RW_Outside

L1, L2, L3 L2, L3 L4,L5,L6

Top Wall Footing Bottom of the footing

310 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point/Link
L7 L8 L9 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

Codes
Pave1 Pave2 Base, Datum RWall Barrier Pave1 Pave2 Base

Description

Coding Diagram

RetainWallTieToDitch | 311

RetainWallToLowSide
This subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one tapered side.

312 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

The wall is pushed to a side so that all of the footing is on the high fill side. This subassembly also adds an optional key at the bottom.

Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is in cut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near the top of the retaining wall. The attachment point is near the footing if it is inserted in cut condition.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Specifies the width of the wall at the top

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Wall Top Width

Numeric

0.958 ft 0.292 m

RetainWallToLowSide | 313

Parameter
Top Height

Description
the distance between the top-of-the wall and the hook in fill or the new hook in cut. The depth of cover from the top-offooting to the finish grade line on the back side of the wall in fill or to the hook when in cut. Species to add an optional key below the footing

Type

Default

Footing Cover

Key

Boolean

Yes

Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point of ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall battered slope, width of the footing, optional key dimensions, and the location of the key center, are all functions of the wall height.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Wall Height

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed wall height and tie to a profile. Assigned profile corresponds to Existing ground surface name to determine retaining wall in cut or fill.

Status
Optional

Target Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either left or right sides. The attachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of the wall, below the top of the wall, at a distance equal to the Top Height parameter. In

314 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

cut, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face, above the top-of-footing, at a distance equal to the Footing Cover parameter. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height or Profile input. In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In cut, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway, towards the earth being retained. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are inserted.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P2 P3 P14 P12

Codes
RW_Front RW_Top RW_Back RW_Hinge RW_Inside

Description

Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3 to P14; L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;

P5

RW_Outside

L1, L2, L3 L4,L5,L6 S1

Top, Wall Datum RWall

RetainWallToLowSide | 315

Coding Diagram
Fill Condition

Cut Condition

RetainWallVertical
This subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with both sides as vertical walls (no tapered side), and an optional key at the bottom.

316 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is in cut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near top of the retaining wall. If it is in cut, the attachment point is near the footing.

RetainWallVertical | 317

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Specifies the width of the wall.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Wall Width

Numeric

0.958 ft 0.292 m

Top Height

the distance between the topof-the wall and the hook in fill or the new hook in cut. The depth of cover from the top-of-footing to the finish grade line on the back side of the wall in fill or to the hook when in cut. Species to add an optional key below the footing Boolean Yes

Footing Cover

Key

Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point of ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Width of the footing, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions, and the location of the key center, are all functions of the wall height.

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Wall Height

Type
Profile

Description
May be used to override the fixed wall height and tie to a profile. Assigned profile corresponds to

Status
Optional

318 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Target Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Existing ground surface name to determine retaining wall in cut or fill.

Status
Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. The attachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of the wall, below the top of the wall, at a distance equal to the Top Height parameter. In cut, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face, above the top-of-footing at a distance equal to the Footing Cover parameter. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height or Profile input. In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In cut, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway, towards the earth being retained. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are inserted.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P2 P3 P14

Codes
RW_Front RW_Top RW_Back RW_Hinge

Description

RetainWallVertical | 319

Point/Link
P12 P5 L1, L2, L3 L4,L5,L6 S1

Codes
RW_Inside RW_Outside Top Datum RWall

Description
Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface Could be used as breaklines in building datum surface L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3 to P14; L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;

Coding Diagram
Fill Condition

Cut Condition

320 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

ShapeTrapezoidal
This subassembly inserts a trapezoidal shape with flexible parameters and codes. This shape can be used as a lane or a shoulder using superelevation parameters for the slope. The width and outside edge elevation can be calculated based on an optional alignment and profile. If multiple shapes are stacked, the bottom slope can be used as the top slope of subsequent shapes. If shapes are butted together, the outside depth can be used as the inside depth of the next subassembly. The point, link, and shape codes are left undefined so the shape can be used to represent different materials in various scenarios.

ShapeTrapezoidal | 321

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the shape.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
True inserts the shape to the left of the attachment point. False inserts the shoulder to the right of the attachment point. Width from the attachment point to the shoulder outside point Default cross slope of the shape surface. This value is used if the superelevation slope is not used or is not specified for the baseline alignment. Specifies to use the slope from the superelevation specification defined on the baseline alignment.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Width

Numeric

2.4 m 8.0 ft -2.0%

Default Cross Slope

Numeric

Use Superelevation Slope

List of options: a.) No, b.) Outside Lane Slope, c.) Inside Lane Slope, d.) Outside Shoulder Slope, e.) Inside Shoulder Slope Numeric, positive

No

Inside Depth

Depth at the attachment point.

0.25 m 1.0 ft 0.125 m 0.5 ft

Outside Depth

Depth opposite the attachment point.

Numeric, positive

Inside Top Codes

User-defined point codes.

322 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Outside Top Codes Inside Bottom Codes Outside Bottom Codes Bottom Link Codes

Description
User-defined point codes. User-defined point codes. User-defined point codes.

Type

Default

Numeric, positive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

User-defined link codes.

Numeric, positive

Shape Code

User-defined shape codes.

Numeric

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Width

Type
Alignment

Type of Assignment
May be used to override the fixed Width and tie the edge-of-shape to an offset aligning. May be used to override the normal shape slope and tie the top outside shape edge to the elevation of a profile.

Status
Optional

Outside Elevation

Profile

Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Top Slope Bottom Slope Width Outside Depth

Description
Slope of the top link Slope of the bottom link Width of the shape Outside depth of the shape

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

ShapeTrapezoidal | 323

Behavior
The finish grade of the shape is inserted for the given Width and % Slope outward from the attachment point. The bottom link slope is calculated based on the inside and outside depth of the shape. The point, link, and shape codes are set in the input parameters using the user-defined strings.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shape for a normal crown roadway situation, with default cross slope as the top link slope value.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Type
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1 L4 S1

Code
Inside Top Code Outside Top Code Inside Bottom Code Outside Bottom Code Top Link Code Bottom Link Code Shape Code

Description
User-defined point code User-defined point code User-defined point code User-defined point code User-defined link code User-defined link code User-defined shape code

324 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

ShoulderExtendAll
This subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with all pavement, base, and subbase layers extended to the shoulder daylight slope.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which is typically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.

ShoulderExtendAll | 325

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
True inserts the shoulder to the left of the attachment point. False inserts the shoulder to the right of the attachment point. Width from the attachment point to the shoulder hinge point Specifies to use the slope from the superelevation specification defined on the baseline alignment.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Shoulder Width

Numeric

2.4 m 8.0 ft No

Use Superelevation Slope

List of options: a.) No, b.) Outside shoulder slope, c.) Inside shoulder slope Numeric

Default Shoulder Slope

Default cross slope of the shape surface. This value is used if superelevation slope is not used, or is not specified for the baseline alignment. Select whether to hold the daylight link to a fixed slope with variable width, or hold it to a fixed width with variable slope The value of the fixed width or fixed slope (x : 1) of the daylight link Specifies to use shoulder superelevation slope to subbase.

- 2.0 %

Subbase Daylight Type

Selection list

Hold slope

Daylight Slope / Width Superelevate SubBase

Numeric, positive List of options: a.) Yes, b.) No

4 ( : 1)

No

326 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Default SubBase Slope

Description
Default cross slope of the shape surface. This value is used if superelevation slope is not used, or is not specified for the baseline alignment. Depth between finish grade and Pave1

Type
Numeric

Default
- 2.0 %

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2

Base Depth

Depth between Pave2 and Base

Subbase Depth

Depth of the subbase layer at the attachment point

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Shoulder Width

Type
Alignment

Type of Assignment
May be used to override the fixed Shoulder Width and tie the edge-of-shoulder to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Slope Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Slope of the daylight link Offset of the subgrade daylight point Elevation of the subgrade daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric

ShoulderExtendAll | 327

Behavior
The finish grade of the shoulder is inserted for the given Shoulder Width and Default Shoulder Slope outward from the attachment point. The subbase link is inserted from the attachment point starting at the Subbase Depth below the finish grade. The shoulder daylight link can be inserted with either a fixed slope (Hold Daylight Slope = True), or a fixed width (Hold Daylight Slope = False). If a fixed slope is used, the daylight link is extended from the outside edge of the shoulder until it intersects the subbase link. Otherwise, the subbase layer is extended for the Daylight Width beyond the outside edge of the shoulder, and the daylight link is connected to the end of the subbase. The Pave1, Pave2, and Base surface links are inserted parallel to the finish grade at the given depths until they intersect with the shoulder daylight link.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulder for a normal crown roadway situation, using default shoulder and subbase cross slope.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Type
P2 P4 P6 P8 P10 L1, L3 L4

Code
EPS EPS_Pave1 EPS_Pave2 EPS_Base Daylight_Sub Top, Pave1 Pave2

Description
Edge of paved shoulder, finish grade Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1 Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2 Edge of paved shoulder on Base Subbase daylight point Paved finish grade Top of Pavement2

328 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Type
L6 L7 L9 L10 L12 L15 S1 S2 S3 S4

Code
Pave2, Top Pave3 Pave3, Top Base Base, Top Subbase Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Description
Top of Pavement2 Top of Pavement3 Top of Pavement3 Top of the base course Top of the base course Bottom of subbase

ShoulderExtendAll | 329

Coding Diagram

ShoulderExtendSubbase
This subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with the subbase layer extended to a daylight point.

330 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which is typically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
True inserts the shoulder to the left of the attachment point. False inserts the shouler to the right of the attachment point. Width from the attachment point to the shoulder hinge point % slope of the paved shoulder surface. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment:

Type
Left/Right

Default
Right

Shoulder Width

Numeric

2.4 m 8.0 ft SO

Shoulder % Slope

String

ShoulderExtendSubbase | 331

Parameter

Description
Code: Superelevation Type SI: inside shoulder slope SO: outside shoulder slope

Type

Default

Subbase Daylight Type

Select whether to hold the daylight link to a fixed slope with variable width, or hold it to a fixed width with variable slope The value of the fixed width or fixed slope (x : 1) of the daylight link % slope of the shoulder subbase surface. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type SI: inside shoulder slope SO: outside shoulder slope Width that the Pave1 layer extends beyond the shoulder hinge point. The bottom of the Pave1 layer may not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope. Width that the Pave2 layer extends beyond the shoulder hinge point. This should be equal to or greater than the Pave1 Extension.The Pave2 layer may not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope. Width that the Base layer extends beyond the shoulder hinge point. This should be equal to or greater than the Pave2 Extension. The Base layer may not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope. Depth between finish grade and Pave1

Selection list

Hold slope

Daylight Slope / Width Subbase Slope

Numeric, positive String

4 ( : 1)

SO

Pave1 Extension

Numeric, positive

0.0

Pave2 Extension

Numeric, positive

0.0

Base Extension

Numeric, positive

0.0

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft

Pave2 Depth

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2

332 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Base Depth

Description
Depth between Pave2 and Base

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric

Default
0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Subbase Depth

Depth of the subbase layer at the attachment point

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Shoulder Width

Type
Alignment

Type of Assignment
May be used to override the fixed Shoulder Width and tie the edge-of-shoulder to an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Output Parameters
Parameter
Daylight Slope Daylight Offset Daylight Elevation

Description
Slope of the daylight link Offset of the subgrade daylight point Elevation of the subgrade daylight point

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
The finish grade of the shoulder is inserted for the given Shoulder Width and Shoulder % Slope outward from the attachment point, and the subbase link is inserted from the attachment point offset starting at the Subbase Depth below the finish grade. The shoulder daylight link can be inserted with either a fixed slope (Hold Daylight Slope = True) or a fixed width (Hold Daylight Slope = False). If a fixed slope is used, the daylight link is extended from the outside edge of shoulder until it intersects the subbase link. Otherwise the subbase layer is extended for the Daylight Width beyond the outside edge of shoulder, and the daylight link is connected to the end of the subbase.

ShoulderExtendSubbase | 333

The Pave1, Pave2, and Base surface links are inserted parallel to the finish grade at the given depths. If the layer Extension values are non-zero, each layer is extended for the given distance beyond the shoulder hinge point. If a layer extends past the daylight slope, the layer is terminated at the daylight slope intersection. Each layer should be as wide or wider than the one above it.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulder for a normal crown roadway situation. If numeric slope values are given for the Shoulder % Slope and Subbase % Slope, the links are shown at the given slope values. Otherwise the default slopes of -6% are used.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Type
P2 P4 P13 P7 P11 L1, L2 L4 L8 L12 L15

Code
EPS EPS Pave1 EPS Pave2 EPS Base Daylight Sub Top, Pave Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase Datum

Description
Edge of paved shoulder, finish grade Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1 Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2 Edge of paved shoulder on Base Subbase daylight point Paved finish grade

334 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Type
L14 Other Links S1 S2 S3 S4

Code
Top, Gravel As shown below Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Description
Unpaved finish grade Unpaved finish grade

ShoulderExtendSubbase | 335

Coding Diagram

ShoulderVerticalSubbase
This subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with the pavement and subbase layers terminating with a vertical link.

336 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which is typically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
True inserts the shoulder to the left of the attachment point; False inserts the shoulder to the right of the attachment point. Width from the attachment point to the edge of paved shoulder % slope of the paved shoulder surface. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: Code: Superelevation Type SI: inside shoulder slope SO: outside shoulder slope Determines when or if the unpaved portion of the shoulder is inserted. Value should be one of the following: Code: Treatment 1: Always used 2: Used only if shoulder is in cut 3: Used only if shoulder is in cut, or is in fill on the high side of superelevation. Width of the unpaved portion of the shoulder. Set to zero to omit the unpaved link.

Type
Left/Right

Default
Right

Paved Width

Numeric

2.4 m 8.0 ft -6 (%)

Paved %Slope

String

Unpaved Link Treatment

Numeric, 13

Unpaved Width

Numeric, positive

1.8 m 6.0 ft

ShoulderVerticalSubbase | 337

Parameter
Unpaved % Slope

Description
% slope of the unpaved shoulder surface

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
-6 (%)

Unpaved Max Breakover

Maximum breakover between the % slopes of the paved and unpaved portions on the high side of superelevation Depth between finish grade and Pave1

8 (%)

Pave1 Depth

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric

0.025m 0.083 ft 0.025 m 0.083 ft 0.100 m 0.333 ft 0.300 m 1.0 ft

Pave2 Depth

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2

Base Depth

Depth between Pave2 and Base

Subbase Depth

Depth between Base and Subbase

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Paved Width

Type
Alignment

Type of Assignment
May be used to override the fixed Paved Width and tie the edge-of-shoulder to an offset alignment Used to determine if the outside edge of paved shoulder is in cut or fill. This parameter is not needed if the Unpaved Link Treatment is 1.

Status
Optional

Daylight Surface

Surface

Conditional; required if Unpaved Link Treatment is 2 or 3.

Output Parameters
None.

338 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Behavior
The links for the shoulder finish grade, Pave1, Pave2, Base and Subbase are inserted outward using the given Paved Width, Paved % Slope, material depths. If the Unpaved Link Treatment is 1, the unpaved shoulder link is inserted under all conditions. If the Treatment code is 2, the outside edge of the paved shoulder is checked to determine if it is in cut or fill; the unpaved shoulder link is inserted only in cut. Treatment code 3 uses the unpaved link in cut, or when the paved shoulder link has a positive %slope.The unpaved finish grade link is inserted at the given Unpaved % Slope, unless the difference between the Paved %Slope and Unpaved %Slope exceeds the Unpaved Max Breakover value. In that case the slope of the unpaved link is adjusted to hold the difference to the given breakover..

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulder for the normal crown roadway condition, based on the input parameters provided. If a numeric value is given for the Paved %Slope, the paved portion of the shoulder is calculated based on that value. Otherwise the default value of -6% is used.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point, Link, or Shape
P2 P3 P5 P7 P9 P11 L1

Code

Description

EPS ES_Unpaved EPS_Pave1 EPS_Pave2 EPS_Base EPS_Sub Top, Pave

Edge of paved shoulder Edge of the unpaved shoulder Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1 Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2 Edge of paved shoulder on Base Edge of paved shoulder on Subbase Paved finish grade

ShoulderVerticalSubbase | 339

Point, Link, or Shape


L2

Code

Description

Top, Datum Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase, Datum Datum Pave1 Pave2 Base Subbase

Unpaved finish grade

L3 L4 L5 L6

L7 L10 S1 S2 S3 S4

Coding Diagram

340 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

SideDitch
The subassembly is used to create a ditch structure with optional backslope and foreslopes.

Attachment
The attachment point is the innermost point on the grading links preceding the ditch structure. If grading links are omitted, then the attachment point is the innermost point on the inside wall of the ditch structure (shown in blue circle).

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

SideDitch | 341

Parameter
Depth

Description
Inside depth of the ditch.

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default
0.45 m 1.5 ft 0.5 m 1.5 ft 1:2 0.1 m 0.33 ft 0.15 m 0.45 ft 1.5 m 5.0 ft 0.1 m 0.33 ft

Bottom Width

Width of bottom of the channel.

Numeric, Positive

Sideslope Ditch Wall Depth

Ditch sideslopes Depth of the ditch wall

Numeric Numeric, Positive

Inside Extension Height Inside Backslope Width Outside Backslope Width

Non-lined extension of ditch inside over the attachment point Ditch backfill width on left side

Numeric, Positive

Numeric, Positive

Width of non-lined width beyond the outer point of the ditch structure

Numeric, Positive

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in the above illustration.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly is created outward, starting from the attachment point, as defined using the input parameters.

342 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1, P6 P2, P5 P10 P11 L9, L10, L11 L1 to L5 L6, L7, L8 S1

Codes
Ditch_Back Ditch_Face Ditch_In Ditch_Out Top, Datum Top, Ditch_Top Datum, Ditch_Bottom Ditch

Description

Ditch structure shape area

Coding Diagram

SideDitch | 343

SideDitchUShape
This subassembly creates a ditch structure with optional bench and backslopes on the inside and the outside of the structure.

Attachment
The attachment point is the innermost point of the optional inside bench. If inside benches are omitted, the attachment point is on the innermost point of the inside wall of the ditch structure.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Bottom width of the ditch

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Bottom Width

Numeric, Positive

2.0 ft 0.6 m 2.0 ft

Ditch Depth

Depth of the ditch

Numeric, Positive

344 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter

Description

Type

Default
0.6 m

A1

Thickness of the inside wall at the top

Numeric, Positive

0.45 ft 0.15m 0.6 ft 0.2m 0.5 ft 0.15 m 2.0 ft 0.6 m 0.0 ft 0.0 m

B1

Increased wall thickness of the inside wall at the bottom Thickness of ditch bottom lining

Numeric, Positive

Numeric, Positive

Depth of the tapered face on the inside wall Depth of the hinge point where the start of inside bench/backslope links is located Width of the (optional) inside bench. Enter ZERO for no bench Cross grade of the (optional) inside bench. It is measured away from the ditch structure edge, and a positive slope indicates rising bench from the ditch Inside backslope link (optional) width. Enter ZERO value for no backslope link Slope of the (optional) inside backslope link. It is measured away from the ditch structure, and a positive slope indicates rising link from the start point

Numeric, Positive

E1

Numeric, Positive

Inside Bench Width Inside Bench Grade

Numeric, positive

1.5 ft 0.5 m 4%

Numeric, Grade type

F1

Numeric, Positive

1.0 ft 0.3 m

G1

Numeric, Slope type

1:1

SideDitchUShape | 345

Parameter
A2

Description
Thickness of the inside wall at the top

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default
0.45 ft 0.15 m 0.6 ft 0.2 m 1.0 ft 0.3 m 3.0 ft 1.0 m 4%

B2

Tapered width of the outside wall

Numeric, Positive

E2

Depth of the hinge point for the start of outside bench/backslope links Width of the (optional) outside bench. Enter ZERO for no bench Cross grade of the (optional) outside bench. It is measured away from the ditch structure edge, and a positive slope indicates rising bench from the ditch Outside backslope link (optional) width. Enter ZERO value for no backslope link Slope of the (optional) outside backslope link. It is measured away from the ditch structure, and a positive slope indicates rising link from the start point

Numeric, Positive

Outside Bench Width Outside Bench Grade

Numeric, positive

Numeric, Grade type

F2

Numeric, Positive

1.0 ft 0.3 m

G2

Numeric, Slope type

1:1

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

346 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Output Parameters Behavior


The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in the illustration. To omit benching and foreslope links, enter zero for the appropriate width parameters.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the input parameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P10 P1, P6 P2, P5 P14 L10, L13 L10, L13

Codes
Ditch_In Ditch_Back Ditch_Face Ditch_Out Top Datum

Description

If the offsets of P11 is < P8; and P13 is > P9 respectively

L11 L12 L1 and L5 L1 to L5 L8 and L9

Top Top Top Ditch_Top Datum

SideDitchUShape | 347

Point/Link
L10, to L13 L6 S1

Codes
Backfill Backfill_Face Ditch

Description

Ditch structure shape area

Coding Diagram

SideDitchWithLid
This subassembly creates a ditch structure to add to either the left or the right sides of the assembly.

348 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Optionally, this subassembly can add daylight links on either side of the structure.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the innermost point on the grading links preceding the ditch structure. If the grading links on the inside are omitted, then the attachment point is on the innermost point of the inside wall.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Depth of the ditch on the inside

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Ditch Depth

Numeric, Positive

2.0ft 0.6m

SideDitchWithLid | 349

Parameter
Bottom Width

Description
Bottom width of the ditch

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default
1.0ft 0.3m 2.0ft 0.6m 0ft 0m 0.45ft 0.15m 0.6ft 0.2m 0.6 ft 0.2 m 0.6 ft 0.2 m 1.5 ft 0.5 m

Top Width

Ditch opening at the lid

Numeric, Positive

Lid Gap

Gap between the lid sides and the inside walls Top inside wall thickness near the lid Inside wall thickness of the ditch structure Lid depth on the inside

Numeric, Positive

A1

Numeric, Positive

B1

Numeric, Positive

C1

Numeric, Positive

Ditch bottom bed depth

Numeric, Positive

Inside Bench Width

Width of the (optional) inside bench. Enter ZERO for no bench Cross grade of the (optional) inside bench. It is measured away from the ditch structure edge, and a positive slope indicates rising bench from the ditch Inside backslope link (optional) width. Enter ZERO value for no backslope link

Numeric, positive

Inside Bench Grade

Numeric, Grade type

4%

F1

Numeric

1.0 ft 0.3 m

350 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
G1

Description
Slope of the (optional) inside backslope link. It is measured away from the ditch structure, and a positive slope indicates rising link from the start point Top outside wall thickness near the lid Outside wall thickness of the ditch structure Lid depth on the outside

Type
Numeric, Slope type

Default
1:1

A2

Numeric, Positive

0.45 ft 0.15 m 0.6 ft 0.2 m 0.45 ft 0.15 m 0 ft 0m

B2

Numeric, Positive

C2

Numeric, Positive

Depth of the hinge point where the start of outside bench/backslope links is located Width of the (optional) outside bench. Enter ZERO for no bench Cross grade of the (optional) outside bench. It is measured away from the ditch structure edge, and a positive slope indicates rising bench from the ditch Outside backslope link (optional) width. Enter ZERO value for no backslope link Slope of the (optional) outside backslope link. It is

Numeric, Positive

Outside Bench Width

Outside Bench Width

3.5ft 1.1m

Outside Bench Grade

Outside Bench Grade

4%

F2

Numeric, Positive

0.3

G2

Numeric, Slope type

1:1

SideDitchWithLid | 351

Parameter

Description
measured away from the ditch structure, and a positive slope indicates rising link from the start point

Type

Default

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in the above illustration. To omit the daylight and bench links, enter a zero value for the appropriate width parameters.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the input parameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P1, P4 P2, P3 P15, P16 P21

Codes
Ditch_In Ditch_Back Ditch_Lid_Face Lid_Top Ditch_Back_Fill

Description

L2 is defined by these two points

352 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point/Link
P23 L18, L19, L20, L21 L1, L2, L3 L4, L5, L6 S1 S2

Codes
Ditch_Out Top, Datum Top Datum Ditch Lid

Description

Ditch structure shape area Lid structure area

Coding Diagram

SideDitchWithLid | 353

SnapToMarkedPoint
This subassembly is a general purpose subassembly to connect a link from the attachment point to a previously named marked point.

Unlike the LinkToMarkedPoint subassembly, with the SnapToMarkedPoint subassembly the previously named marked point can be on any subassembly group. The SnapToMarkedPoint subassembly can be used in a variety of situations, including connecting between adjacent roadways where the relative offsets and elevations vary, or across a gore area between converging roadways. Use the MarkPoint subassembly if the connecting point has not already been named.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The link may go in any direction. The direction is determined by the location of the marked point relative to the attachment point.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Marked Point Name

Description
Name of the marked point to connect to.

Type
String

Default
None

354 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Link Codes

Description
A list of codes to be assigned to the link.

Type
Comma-separated string True to add the end point only.

Default
Top, Datum

Omit Link

False to add the link, the start point, and the end point.

True / False

False

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
Parameter
Begin Offset Begin Elevation End Offset End Elevation

Description
+/- offset of the beginning of the link. Elevation of the beginning of the link +/- offset of the end of the link Elevation of the end of the link

Type
Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric

Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given marked point.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the subassembly displays the link between the attachment point and the marked point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


None.

SnapToMarkedPoint | 355

Coding Diagram

StrippingPavement
This subassembly is used to specify the existing top layer stripping to a specified depth.

356 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Optionally, this subassembly can extend the stripping back to the existing ground with a specified backslope.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the daylight point on the finish grade.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Stripping Depth

Description
Specifies depth of the topsoil to remove. Specifies to extend the stripping back to existing ground Default foreslope of the stripping extension from original daylight point to beginning of back slope. Backslope to grade from bottom of stripping back into the existing ground

Type
Numeric

Default
0.05m 0.167ft Yes

Extend to Existing Ground

Boolean

Foreslope

Numeric

-2 (:1)

Backslope

Numeric, positive

2 (:1)

StrippingPavement | 357

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the existing surface to grade back from bottom of stripping.

Status
Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the bottom of the stripping layer below a specified surface. If the option to extend stripping to the existing ground with a backslope is set to No, then stripping starts at the attachment point directly on the specified surface, with a vertical link with depth value specified in the input parameters. From the bottom of this vertical link, a series of links parallel to the specified surface are introduced inwards, until the baseline location of the assembly. If the option to extend stripping to the existing ground is set to Yes, then at the attachment point, a link is introduced with the specified foreslope, until the elevation difference between the bottom of this new link and the specified existing ground is equal to the stripping depth. From this point, a series of links parallel to the specified surface are introduced inwards, until the baseline location of the assembly. Additionally, another link outwardly is added to daylight to existing ground.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly inserts a horizontal line below the attachment point, towards the baseline location. This link is inserted from the attachment point at a depth equal to the stripping depth. If the option to extend the stripping link to a surface is selected, then a foreslope link with a specified slope value to the stripping depth is inserted first, and then the horizontal link is added, as explained previously. Also, a backslope link is added outward, from the outside bottom of the stripping link with a specified foreslope, and to the elevation equal to the subassembly attachment point.

358 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P3 L1 L2, L3, L4 Ln

Codes
Daylight_Strip (Only for Case 1) Foreslope_Stripping (Only for case 1) Stripping

Description
Daylight point of stripping backslope link Stripping foreslope link defining backfill Stripping links

Coding Diagram

StrippingPavement | 359

StrippingTopSoil
This subassembly is used to specify stripping of top soil to a specified depth.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside of the stripping link.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Specifies the direction of stripping with respect to attachment point. Specifies depth of the topsoil to remove.

Type
Left / Right/Right Numeric

Default
Right

Stripping Depth

0.05m 0.167ft 5m 16.67ft -2 (:1)

Stripping Width

Specifies width of the topsoil stripping region. Default foreslope of the stripping extension from original daylight point to beginning of back slope.

Numeric

Foreslope

Numeric

360 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Backslope

Description
Backslope to grade from bottom of stripping back into the existing ground

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
2 (:1)

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Stripping Width

Type
Alignment

Description
May be used to override the fixed Stripping Width and tie to an offset alignment. Name of the existing surface to grade back from bottom of stripping.

Status
Optional

Existing Surface

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
None.

Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the bottom of the stripping layer below a specified surface. If the option to extend stripping to the existing ground with a backslopes is set to No, then stripping starts at the attachment point, directly on the specified surface, with a vertical link that has the depth value specified in the input parameters. From the bottom of this vertical link, a series of links parallel to the specified surface are introduced inwards, until baseline location of the assembly. From the attachment point, a link is created with a specified foreslope. The link is drawn until the elevation difference between its lowest point and the existing ground is equal to the stripping depth. Also, a backslope link is introduced inwards, from the topsoil surface, from an offset defined by the stripping width parameter. Next a series of links parallel to the specified topsoil surface are introduced, connecting above two new links to define the stripping layer.

StrippingTopSoil | 361

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, foreslope and backslope links are added using the input parameters. Connecting the bottom of these two links, a horizontal line is added to represent the stripping layer.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P2 All Links

Codes
Daylight_Strip Stripping

Description
Daylight point of stripping backslope link Stripping links

Coding Diagram

TrenchWithPipe
This subassembly creates a stone-filled drain structure with a circular pipe inside.

362 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Attachment
The attachment point for this subassembly can be at the bottom center, the top center, or the top corner of the drain structure.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates which side the subassembly is inserted towards. Specifies location of subassembly attachment point.

Type
Left / Right

Default
Right

Attachment Point

String; (a) Top center; (b) Bottom center, (c) Top corner Numeric, Positive

Top corner

Bottom Width

Bottom Width of the trench

1.0 ft 0.3 m

TrenchWithPipe | 363

Parameter
Top Width

Description
Top width of the trench

Type
Numeric, Positive

Default
1.5 ft 0.5 m 2.0 ft 0.6 m 0.6 ft 0.2 m 0.6 ft 0.2 ft 0.0 ft 0.0 m

Depth

Total depth of the trench

Numeric, Positive

Bedding Depth

Depth of the pipe bedding over trench bottom Drain pipe diameter

Numeric, Positive

Pipe Diameter

Numeric, Positive

Pipe Thickness

Thickness of the pipe material (optional)

Numeric, Positive

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Depth

Type
Profile

Description
Depth of the trench can be optionally be overridden from a profile elevation. If the attachment point is on the top of the trench, then this profile is assigned for the trench bottom and vice-versa.

Status
Optional

Output Parameters Behavior


The subassembly builds the shape for a simple drain structure as shown in the above illustration.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the input parameters, starting from the attachment point.

364 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point/Link
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7

Codes
Drain_Bottom Drain_Bottom_Outside Drain_Top_Outside Drain_Top_Inside Drain_Bottom_Inside Drain_Center Flow_Line

Description

Use existing point code, if any, among curb and gutters.

L1 L2, L3, L4 S1 S2

Top, Drain_Top Datum, Drain_Bottom Trench_Backfill Drain_Area

TrenchWithPipe | 365

Coding Diagram

TrenchPipe1
This subassembly creates a flat-bottom trench with equal sideslopes and up to three layers of backfill material.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the Offset To Bottom distance above the midpoint of the base of the trench.

366 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Width

Description
Width of the bottom of the trench

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
2.0 m 6.0 ft 3:1

Sideslope

X : 1 slope of the trench sideslopes

Bedding Depth

Depth of the bedding layer

0.0

Special Backfill Depth Offset to Bottom

Depth of the special backfill layer

0.0

The vertical offset down from the profile grade line elevation to the bottom of the trench. For example, if the profile runs along the top of a circular pipe, the vertical offset is the pipe diameter plus the distance from the bottom of the pipe to the bottom of the trench.

0.0

Behavior
The elevation of the bottom of the trench is calculated as the profile grade line elevation minus the Offset To Bottom value. The horizontal trench bottom link is placed symmetrically about the attachment point offset at that elevation, and the sideslopes are extended upward to the Existing Surface. The horizontal Bedding link is placed at the given depth above the trench bottom. The horizontal Special Backfill link is placed at the given depth above the Bedding link.

TrenchPipe1 | 367

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Existing Surface

Type
Surface

Description
Surface model defining the existing roadway surface

Status
Required

Output Parameters
None.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, the trench and existing surface are drawn as shown below.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1, P2 P3, P4 P5, P6

Code
Trench_Bottom Trench_Daylight Trench_Bedding

Description

368 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
P7, P8 L1 L7 L8 L9 S1 S2

Code
Trench_Backfill Trench Datum Trench_Bottom Trench_Daylight Trench_Bedding Trench_Backfill

Description

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterGeneral
This subassembly inserts links for a standard shape concrete curb-and-gutter with subbase. User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

UrbanCurbGutterGeneral | 369

Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of the curb.

Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensions must be given in millimeters or inches. Parameter
Side Insertion Point

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as either Gutter Edge or Back of Curb Specifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outside lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flow line from flange point.

Type
Left/Right Boolean

Default
Right Gutter Edge Outside lane superelevation slope - 2% 0.450 m 1.5 ft

Gutter Slope Method

Boolean

Gutter Slope Subbase Depth

Specifies fixed gutter slope Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there is no subbase.

Numeric Numeric, positive

370 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Subbase Extension

Description
Distance the subbase is extended beyond the backof-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb. Selects whether to use the Outside Lane superelevation slope for the subbase layer, or to set a numeric % slope value % slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE is set to True. Depth of the gutter at the flange point

Type
Numeric, positive

Default
0.3 m 1.0 ft

Use SE

Selection list

Use superelevation

Subbase %Slope

Numeric

-2 (%)

Dimension A (mm/in)

Numeric, positive, non-zero

175 mm 7 in

Dimension B (mm/in) Dimension C (mm/in)

Width from the flange point to the gutter flowline

400 mm 16 in Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero 25 mm 1 in

Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowline

Dimension D (mm/in)

Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the topof-curb

150 mm 6 in

Dimension E (mm/in)

Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curb

200 mm 8 in

Dimension F (mm/in)

Width of the top-of-curb

150 mm 6 in

Dimension G (mm/in)

Height of the back-of-curb

325 mm 13 in

UrbanCurbGutterGeneral | 371

Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensions Dimension A Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram. The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with the attachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the back of the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make it non-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter component based on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true, the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1 L3

Code
Flange Flowline_Gutter TopCurb BackCurb Top, Curb

Description
Flange point of the gutter Gutter flowline point Top-of-curb Back-of-curb Finish grade on the curb and gutter

372 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
L7

Code
Subbase Datum Curb Subbase

Description

S1 S2

Curb-and-gutter concrete area

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterValley1
This subassembly inserts links for a flat-bottomed valley curb and gutter with subbase. User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

UrbanCurbGutterValley1 | 373

Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of the curb.

Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensions must be given in millimeters or inches. Parameter
Side Insertion Point

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as either Gutter Edge or Back of Curb Specifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outside lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flow line from flange point. Specifies fixed gutter slope Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there is no subbase. Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb

Type
Left/Right Boolean

Default
Right Gutter Edge

Gutter Slope Method

Boolean

Outside lane superelevation slope - 2% 0.450 m 1.5 ft 0.3 m 1 ft

Gutter Slope Subbase Depth

Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Subbase Extension

374 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Use SE

Description
True uses the outside lane superelevation slope for the subbase layer. False specifies a numeric %slope. % slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE is set to True. Depth of the gutter at the flange point

Type
True/False

Default
True

Subbase %Slope

Numeric

-2 (%)

Dimension A

Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero

175 mm 7 in

Dimension B

Width from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline

375 mm 15 in

Dimension C

Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline

25 mm 1 in

Dimension D

Height from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

75 mm 3 in

Dimension E

Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

225 mm 9 in

Dimension F

Height of the back-of-curb

250 mm 9 in

Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensions Dimension A Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.

UrbanCurbGutterValley1 | 375

The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with the attachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the back of the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make it non-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter component based on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true, the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2 P3

Code
Flange Flowline_Gutter TopCurb BackCurb Top, Curb Subbase Datum Curb Subbase

Description
Flange point of the gutter Gutter flowline point Top-of-curb

L1, L2

Finish grade on the curb and gutter

L6

S1 S2

Curb-and-gutter concrete area

376 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterValley2
This subassembly inserts links for a slope-bottomed valley curb and gutter with subbase. User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of the curb.

UrbanCurbGutterValley2 | 377

Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensions must be given in millimeters or inches. Parameter
Side Insertion Point

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as either Gutter Edge or Back of Curb Specifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outside lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flow line from flange point.

Type
Left/Right Boolean

Default
Right Gutter Edge Outside lane superelevation slope - 2% 0.450 m 1.5 ft 0.3 m 1 ft True

Gutter Slope Method

Boolean

Gutter Slope Subbase Depth Subbase Extension Use SE

Specifies fixed gutter slope Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there is no subbase. Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb. True uses the outside lane superelevation slope for the subbase layer. False specifies a numeric %slope. % slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE is set to True. Depth of the gutter at the flange point

Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric, positive True/False

Subbase %Slope Dimension A

Numeric

-2 (%)

Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero

150 mm 6 in

Dimension B

Width from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline

610 mm 24 in

378 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Dimension C

Description
Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline, and from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

Type
Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero

Default
100 mm 4 in

Dimension D

Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

225 mm 9 in

Dimension E

Width from the top-of-curb to back-of-curb

75 mm 3 in

Dimension F

Height of the back-of-curb

300 mm 12 in

Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensions Dimension A Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram. The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with the attachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the back of the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make it non-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

Output Parameters
None.

UrbanCurbGutterValley2 | 379

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter component based on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true, the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1 L3

Code
Flange Flowline_Gutter TopCurb BackCurb Top, Curb Subbase Datum Curb Subbase

Description
Flange point of the gutter Gutter flowline point Top-of-curb Back-of-curb Finish grade on the curb and gutter

L7

S1 S2

Curb-and-gutter concrete area

380 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterValley3
This subassembly inserts links for a slope-bottomed valley curb and gutter with subbase. The bottom surface of the curve flattens to a horizontal link at the gutter flowline. User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of the curb.

UrbanCurbGutterValley3 | 381

Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensions must be given in millimeters or inches. Parameter
Side Insertion Point

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Specifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as either Gutter Edge or Back of Curb Specifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outside lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flow line from flange point.

Type
Left/Right Boolean

Default
Right Gutter Edge Outside lane superelevation slope - 2% 0.450 m 1.5 ft 0.3 m 1 ft

Gutter Slope Method

Boolean

Gutter Slope Subbase Depth

Specifies fixed gutter slope Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there is no subbase. Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-ofcurb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-ofcurb. % slope of the subbase layer. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifications of the baseline alignment: LI inside lane slope LO outside lane slope SI inside shoulder slope SO outside shoulder slope Depth of the gutter at the flange point

Numeric Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Subbase Extension

Subbase %Slope

Numeric or string

-2 (%)

Dimension A

Numeric, positive, non-zero

150 mm 6 in

382 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Dimension B

Description
Width from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline

Type
Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero

Default
600 mm 24 in

Dimension C

Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline, and from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

50 mm 2 in

Dimension D

Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

40 mm 1.5 in

Dimension E

Width from the top-of-curb to back-of-curb

150 mm 6 in

Dimension F

Height of the back-of-curb

300 mm 12 in

Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter values for Dimension A Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram. The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with the attachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the back of the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make it non-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments


None.

UrbanCurbGutterValley3 | 383

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter component based on the input parameters given. If a numeric value is given for the Subbase %Slope, the subbase layer is inserted at the given slope value. Otherwise the default value of -2% is used.

Output Parameters
None.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1 L3

Code
Flange Flowline_Gutter TopCurb BackCurb Top, Curb Subbase Datum Curb Subbase

Description
Flange point of the gutter Gutter flowline point Top-of-curb Back-of-curb Finish grade on the curb and gutter

L8

S1 S2

Curb-and-gutter concrete area

384 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1
This subassembly is used to replace an existing curb and gutter, with the sod strip tying to the existing inside edge of sidewalk. The vertical placement of curb and gutter is determined by allowable milling and/or overlay at the flange points and by allowable ranges of slopes for sod strip. To apply this subassembly, flange point information (alignment or offset value) is essential.

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 385

Attachment
The attachment point is outside/highside point of the sod strip edge of the sidewalk. Though notionally this attachment point is to mark the highside of the sodstrip, actual location of sod strip high point could vary from this as the user attaches an appropriate marked point or alignment and profile. Therefore, this attachment point is more of layout time assistance rather than design point control.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run over rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a "%" sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates the position of the curb and gutter with respect to the attachment point. Point defining the offset of the face of the flange of the gutter. This offset is as neasured from the baseline point. This inside sidewalk point will be used as the high point of sod strip. (OPTIONAL)

Type
Left/Right

Default
Right

Flange Point Offset from CL

Numeric

3.6 m 10 ft

Sidewalk Point

String

None

386 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Max Milling

Description
Maximum allowable depth of the flange point below the edge of existing pavement. Desirable difference in elevation from the edge of existing pavement to the flange point. A positive value is for the flange point being above the existing pavement. Minimum allowable slope from the back of curb to the sidewalk point. Maximum allowable slope from the back of curb to the sidewalk point. Mark Flange Point - name of a marked point to be stored at the flange point - for later rehab subassemblies. The following are the same parameters as CurbAndGutterGeneral subassembly.

Type
Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

Default
0.05 m 2.5 in 0.08m 3.5 in

Desirable Lift

Min Sod Slope

0.02

Max Sod Slope

0.06

Mark Inside Point

String

None

Subbase Depth

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there is no subbase. Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb. % slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE is set to True. Depth of the gutter at the flange point.

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.450 m 1.5 ft 0.3 m 1 ft

Subbase Extension

Subbase %Slope

Numeric

-2 (%)

Dimension A (mm/in)

Numeric, positive, non-zero

150 mm 6 in

Dimension B (mm/in)

Width from the flange point to the gutter flowline.

400 mm 16 in

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 387

Parameter
Dimension C (mm/in)

Description
Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.

Type
Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero

Default
25 mm 1 in

Dimension D (mm/in)

Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the topof-curb.

150 mm 6 in

Dimension E (mm/in)

Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curb.

200 mm 8 in

Dimension F (mm/in)

Width of the top-of-curb.

150 mm 6 in

Dimension G (mm/in)

Height of the back-of-curb.

325 mm 13 in

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Inside Edge of Sidewalk

Type
Alignment

Description
This will set the offset value for the highside point for sod strip. This will establish the offset value of flange point to start the subassembly. This will set the offset value for the highside point for sod strip. Name of the existing surface, used to determine the edge of pavement elevation at the flange point, and is also used to determine

Status
Optional

Flange Point

Alignment

Optional

Left Gutter Profile

Profile

Optional

EGTopSurf

Surface

Required

388 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter

Type

Description
the elevation of the Sidewalk Point if given as an offset or alignment; but profiles not set.

Status

If marked points are provided, runtime logical assignments are unnecessary and will be ignored even if set. If marked points are not set and offsets or alignments are used to locate points, it is expected to set profiles through logical assignment. If they are not, this subassembly takes its elevation from surface set in above logical name mapping.

Output Parameters
Parameter
Sod Strip Slope Gutter Slope

Description
Cross slope of designed sod strip Gutter slope in the new curb and gutter subassembly

Type
Numeric Numeric, positive

Default

Behavior
This subassembly is used to place a new curb and gutter parametrically, and can optionally tie (with a sod strip) into either the inside edge of the existing sidewalk, or to a new sidewalk created with another subasembly. The horizontal placement of the curb and gutter is determined from the previously known flange point location. Highside of the sod strip can be located either by a fixed offset or any other marked point, such as the inside edge of sidewalk. Alternatively, this point can come from logical assignment of an aligment and profile. Newly designed flange point, optionally marked so that it can be used as input later for replacement lane subassemblies. Key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows: 1 Get existing pavement elevation at the flange point offset. 2 Set flange point elevation based on the minimum lift value. 3 Next insert curb and gutter points from P to P4 using the input parameters (similar to CurbAndGutterGeneral). 4 If the inside sidewalk marked point is assigned, establish that point as P10. If marked point is not associated, look for logical assignements for

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 389

'inside edge of sidewalk" alignment. If yes, then get profile elevation or from the surface logical name mapping. 5 If none of the above data is available for the highside of the sod strip, use the offset as dictated by attachment point to establish point P10. 6 Find the slope between P4 and P10. 7 Check whether that slope is within the parameters of Min/Max sod strip slopes. 8 If it is lower than minimum, set the slope to minimum allowable and computed points P4 to P1 backwards. Similarly, if the slope is more than maximum allowable sod strip slopes, set it to maximum allowable and calculate P4 to P1. 9 Check whether the elevation difference between P1 and P11 is within tolerable limits of max milling. If P is below P11 and difference is more than max milling, then abort, resulting in an error displayed in the event viewer. All other curb and gutter links are inserted, based on the Input Parameter dimensions Dimension A - Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb as shown in the diagram.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode , this subassembly is set based on the attachment point and the default flange point offset from baseline. The width of the sod strip is computed by subtracting the curb and gutter total widt from "flange point to attacment point" distance. The minimum allowable sod strip slope is used to calculate the back of curb point from which the rest of the curb and gutter is drawn, using the input parameters given.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2

Code
Flange Flowline_Gutter

Description
Flange point of the gutter Gutter flowline point

390 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
P3 P4 L1L6 L1L3 L7

Code
TopCurb BackCurb Curb Top Subbase Datum Datum Top, Datum, Sod Curb Subbase

Description
Top-of-curb Back-of-curb All curb links Finish grade on the curb and gutter

L4, L8, L9 L11 S1 S2

Curb-and-gutter concrete area

Coding Diagram

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 391

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2
This subassembly is used to replace an existing curb and gutter, with the sod strip tying to the existing inside edge of sidewalk. The vertical placement of the curb and gutter is controlled by a design profile of the back of curb. To apply this subassembly, flange point information (alignment or offset value) is essential.

Attachment
The attachment point is outside/highside point of the sod strip edge of the sidewalk. Though notionally this attachment point is to mark the highside of the sodstrip, actual location of sod strip high point could vary from this as the user attaches an appropriate marked point or alignment and profile. Therefore, this attachment point is more of layout time assistance rather than design point control.

392 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run over rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a "%" sign. Parameter
Side

Description
Indicates the position of the curb and gutter with respect to the attachment point. Point defining the offset of the face of the flange of the gutter. This offset is as measured from the baseline of the assembly (or corridor in corridor state). This inside sidewalk point will be used as the high point of sod strip. (OPTIONAL) Mark Flange Point - name of a marked point to be stored at the flange point - for later rehab subassemblies. The following are the same parameters as CurbAndGutterGeneral subassembly.

Type
Left/Right

Default
Right

Flange Point Offset from CL

Numeric

3.6 m 10 ft

Sidewalk Point

String

None

Mark Inside Point

String

None

Subbase Depth

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there is no subbase. Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb. % slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE is set to True. Depth of the gutter at the flange point.

Numeric, positive Numeric, positive

0.450 m 1.5 ft 0.3 m 1 ft

Subbase Extension

Subbase %Slope

Numeric

-2 (%)

Dimension A (mm/in)

Numeric, positive, non-zero

175 mm 7 in

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 | 393

Parameter
Dimension B (mm/in) Dimension C (mm/in)

Description
Width from the flange point to the gutter flowline.

Type

Default
400 mm 16 in

Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.

Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive, non-zero

25 mm 1 in

Dimension D (mm/in)

Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the topof-curb.

150 mm 6 in

Dimension E (mm/in)

Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curb.

200 mm 8 in

Dimension F (mm/in)

Width of the top-of-curb.

150 mm 6 in

Dimension G (mm/in)

Height of the back-of-curb.

325 mm 13 in

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Inside Edge of Sidewalk

Type
Alignment

Description
This will set offset value for the highside point for sod strip. This will establish offfest of flange point to start the subassembly. This helps position curb and gutter. This will set offset value for the highside point for sod strip.

Status
Optional

Flange Point

Alignment

Optional

Back of Curb Profile Inside Edge of Sidewalk

Profile Profile

Required Optional

394 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
EGTopSurf

Type
Surface

Description
Name of the existing surface, used to determine the edge of pavement elevation at the flange point, and is also used to determine the elevation of the Sidewalk Point if given as an offset or alignment; but profiles not set.

Status
Required

If marked points are provided, runtime logical assignments are unnecessary and will be ignored even if set. If marked points are not set and offsets or alignments are used to locate points, it is expected to set profiles through logical assignment. If they are not, this subassembly takes elevation from surface set in above logical name mapping. If Back of Curb profile is not assigned in corridor definition, then the subassembly aborts with an error message in event viewer.

Output Parameters
Parameter
Sod Strip Slope Gutter Slope

Description
Cross slope of designed sod strip Gutter slope in the new curb and gutter subassembly

Type
Numeric Numeric, positive

Default

Behavior
This subassembly is used to place a new curb and gutter parametrically, and can optionally tie (with a sod strip) into either the inside edge of the existing sidewalk, or to a new sidewalk created with another subasembly. The horizontal placement of the curb and gutter is determined from the previously know flange point location. Highside of the sod strip can be located either by a fixed offset or any other marked point, such as inside edge of sidewalk. Alternatively this point can come from logical assignment of an aligment and profile. Newly designed flange point, optionally marked so that it can be used as input later for replacement lane subassemblies. Key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows: 1 From flange point offset and the input parameters locate the offset of back of curb.

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 | 395

2 From the logical assignment, get the "back of curb" elevation at that station and establish this point P4. 3 From this point establish all curb and gutter points and links using the input parameters (similar to UrbanCurbGutterGeneral1 4 If inside sidewalk marked point is assigned, establish that point as P10. If marked point is not associated, look for logical assignments for 'inside edge of sidewalk" alignment. If yes then get profile elevation or from the surface logical name mapping. 5 If none of the above data is available for the highside of the sod strip, use the offset as dictated by attachment point to establish point P10. All other curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensions Dimension A - Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb as shown in the diagram.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode the subassembly is set based on the attachment point and the default flange point offset from baseline. Width of the sod strip is computed by subtracting the curb and gutter total width from "flange point to attachment point" distance. Use 2% slope to calculate the low side of sod strip (or back of curb point), from which the rest of curb and gutter is drawn using the input parameters given.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2 P3 P4 L1L6

Code
Flange Flowline_Gutter TopCurb BackCurb Curb

Description
Flange point of the gutter Gutter flowline point Top-of-curb Back-of-curb All curb links

396 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Point / Link
L1L3 L7

Code
Top Subbase Datum Datum Top, Datum, Sod Curb Subbase

Description
Finish grade on the curb and gutter

L4, L8, L9 L11 S1 S2

Curb-and-gutter concrete area

Coding Diagram

UrbanReplaceSidewalk
This subassembly is used to replace an existing sidewalk, starting at the existing outside edge of sidewalk and inserting surfaces towards the curb. To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining the existing outside edge of sidewalk information. Elevations at this point could come from a surface or a profile. Furthermore, if the component defining this

UrbanReplaceSidewalk | 397

edge is also another rehab component, then they could be passed in as marked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the outside edge of the sidewalk. For better results, insert this on a controlling offset (with fixed offset) marker point during assembly construction.

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side Outside Sidewalk Marked Point Width

Description
Indicates the inward direction of the sidewalk. To define outside edge of sidewalk and elevation to start the subassembly (OPTIONAL) Width of the sidewalk, measuring inwards from high edge of sidewalk point Cross slope of sidewalk in %, measuring inwards from high edge of sidewalk Depth or thickness of the sidewalk

Type
Left/Right String

Default
Right None

Numeric

1.5m 5.0ft -2%

% Slope

Numeric

Depth

Numeric, positive

398 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Parameter
Mark Inside Point

Description
Name of the marked point to be stored at the new low edge of sidewalk (OPTIONAL)

Type
String

Default
None

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Outside Edge of Sidewalk Left Gutter Profile

Type
Alignment

Description
This will set the outside edge of proposed sidewalk as start point This will set the outside edge elevation value of proposed sidewalk If profiles are not supplied for left/right edge of pavement elevations, then this surface elevation at that offset will be picked up as elevation value

Status
Optional

Profile

Optional

EGTopSurf

Surface

Required

Output Parameters
Parameter
% Slope

Description
Cross slope of sidewalk in %, measuring inwards from high edge of sidewalk Depth or thickness of the sidewalk

Type
Numeric

Default
-2%

Depth

Numeric, positive

Behavior
By default outside edge of sidewalk is located at the attached marked point or at the associated alignment. Similraly elevation is set based on marker point associated, or profile or from the surface at that offset. Once this start point is established,sidewalk structure links are inserted inwards from this point for given width, slope, and depth. If a name is given for Mark Inside Point, a marked point is stored at the new low edge of sidwalk.

UrbanReplaceSidewalk | 399

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly starts at the attached point and draws a single shape with given dimensions, such as width, slope and depth. NOTE While constructing an assembly, it is recommended that this subassembly be added at a controlling offset, if there is no previously marked point. This controlling offset could be at a decent offset from the baseline marker, so that the layout mode looks like a typical section. However, it is recommended that the user doesn't have to map this controlling offset to any "alignment/profile" in the corridor state, as that would cause problems such as making the design not perpendicular to the baseline in some cases. Not associating this controlling offset will not have any effect on the corridor, as the start point is attached to an alignment/marked point through the subassembly macro for an exact location.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P1 P2 L1 L2 S1

Code
Sidewalk_In Sidewalk_Out Top Sidewalk Datum Sidewalk

Description
Inside edge of sidewalk on finish grade Outside edge of sidewalk on finish grade

Sidewalk concrete area

400 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Coding Diagram

UrbanSidewalk
This subassembly inserts links for a concrete sidewalk with inside and outside grass boulevards.

Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the inside boulevard. The UrbanSidewalk subassembly is typically attached to a back-of-curb or edge of pavement.

UrbanSidewalk | 401

Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopes are in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slope with a % sign. Parameter
Side Inside Boulevard Width Sidewalk Width

Description
Specifies which side to place the subassembly Width of the inside grass boulevard

Type
Left/Right Numeric, positive Numeric, positive, non-zero Numeric, positive Numeric

Default
Right 0.0

Width of the concrete sidewalk

1.5 m 5.0 ft

Outside Boulevard Width %Slope

Width of the outside grass boulevard

0.0

% slope of the sidewalk and grass strips. Positive slopes are upwards from the attachment point. Depth of concrete for the sidewalk

2 (%)

Depth

Numeric, positive

0.100 m 0.333 ft

Behavior
The inside grass strip, sidewalk, and outside grass boulevard links are inserted outward from the attachment point at the given slope. The grass strips can be omitted by specifying a zero-width. Optionally, various element widths can be attained by attaching to offset alignments. Also, the sidewalk cross slope can be derived by tying into an offset profile.

402 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Runtime Logical Assignments


Parameter
Inside Boulevard Width

Type
Alignment

Type of Assignment
May be used to override the fixed Inside Boulevard Width and tie the inside edge-of-sidewalk to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Width of Sidewalk and tie the outside edge-of-sidwalk to an offset alignment May be used to override the fixed Outside Boulevard Width with an offset alignment

Status
Optional

Sidewalk Width

Alignment

Optional

Outside Boulevard Width

Alignment

Optional

Output Parameters
None.

Layout Mode Operation


In layout mode, this subassembly displays the boulevards and sidewalk based on the input parameter values given.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes


Point / Link
P2 P3 L1

Code
Sidewalk_In Sidewalk_Out Top Datum Top Sidewalk Top

Description
Inside edge of sidewalk on finish grade Outside edge of sidewalk on finish grade

L2

L3

UrbanSidewalk | 403

Point / Link

Code
Datum

Description

L4 L6

Sidewalk Datum Sidewalk Sidewalk concrete area

S1

Coding Diagram

404 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Index
S
subassemblies 3, 5, 8, 1112, 14, 18, 20, 26, 28, 33, 38, 43, 48, 54, 59, 72, 77, 82, 87, 92, 97, 108, 111, 115, 119, 124, 131, 138, 143, 148, 154, 157, 165, 167, 169, 172, 174, 177, 179, 181, 184, 186, 188, 191, 193, 196, 203, 210, 216, 218, 221, 227, 234, 239, 246, 251, 259, 269, 273, 278, 284, 293, 297, 302, 307, 312, 316, 321, 325, 330, 336, 341, 344, 348, 354, 356, 360, 362, 366, 369, 373, 377, 381, 385, 392, 397, 401 BasicBarrier 3 BasicCurb 5 BasicCurbAndGutter 8 BasicGuardrail 11 BasicLane 12 BasicLaneTransition 14 BasicShoulder 18 BasicSideSlopeCutDitch 20 BasicSideWalk 26 BridgeBoxGirder1 28 BridgeBoxGirder2 33 Channel 38 ChannelParabolicBottom 43 DaylightBasin 48 DaylightBench 54 DaylightGeneral 59 DaylightMaxOffset 72 DaylightMaxWidth 77 DaylightMinOffset 82 DaylightMinWidth 87 DaylightMultiIntercept 92 DaylightStandard 97 DaylightToOffset 108 DaylightToROW 111 GenericPavementStructure 115 introduction 3 LaneBrokenBack 119 LaneFromTaperedMedian1 124 LaneFromTaperedMedian2 131 LaneInsideSuper 119, 138 LaneOutsideSuper 143 LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening148 LaneParabolic 154 LaneTowardCrown 157 LinkMulti 165 LinkOffsetAndElevation 167 LinkOffsetAndSlope 169 LinkOffsetOnSurface 172 LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection 174 LinkSlopesBetweenPoints 177 LinkSlopeToElevation 179 LinkSlopeToSurface 181 LinkToMarkedPoint 184 LinkVertical 186 LinkWidthAndSlope 188 MarkPoint 191 MedianDepressed 193 MedianDepressedShoulderExt 196 MedianDepressedShoulderVert 203 MedianFlushWithBarrier 210 MedianRaisedConstantSlope 216 MedianRaisedWithCrown 218 OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges221, 227 OverlayCrownBetweenEdges 234 OverlayMedianAsymmetrical 239 OverlayMedianSymmetrical 246 OverlayMillAndLevel1 251 OverlayMillAndLevel2 259 OverlayParabolic 269 OverlayWidenMatchSlope 273 OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 278 OverlayWidenWithSuper 284 RailSingle 293 RetainWallTapered 297 RetainWallTaperedWide 302 RetainWallTieToDitch 307 RetainWallToLowSide 312

405 | Index

RetainWallVertical 316 ShapeTrapezoidal 321 ShoulderExtendAll 325 ShoulderExtendSubbase 330 ShoulderVerticalSubbase 336 SideDitch 341 SideDitchUShape 344 SideDitchWithLid 348 SnapToMarkedPoint 354 StrippingPavement 356 StrippingTopSoil 360

TrenchPipe1 366 TrenchWithPipe 362 UrbanCurbGutterGeneral 369 UrbanCurbGutterValley1 373 UrbanCurbGutterValley2 377 UrbanCurbGutterValley3 381 UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 385 UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 392 UrbanReplaceSidewalk 397 UrbanSidewalk 401

406 | Index